drew university washington street, morristown nj 07960 the woolworth building, 233 broadway suite...

95 Washington Street, Morristown NJ 07960 The Woolworth Building, 233 Broadway Suite 2150, New York NY 10279

www.nkarchitects.com

SPECIFICATIONS ARCHITECTURAL & M.E.P.

DREW UNIVERSITY

HALL OF SCIENCES

LABORATORY 129 AND 133 RENOVATION

36 Madison Avenue Madison, New Jersey

NK Project #2199.000

ISSUED FOR REVIEW March 09, 2018

Drew University Hall Of Sciences

Laboratory 129 and 133 Renovation NK Project No.2199.000

INDEX - 1

PART 1 – GENERAL DOCUMENTS PROJECT INDEX DIVISION 00 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (By Owner)

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 011000 Summary

012300 Alternates 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013110 Requests for Interpretation 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training

PART 2 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS (Not Used) DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Section 035413 Gypsum Cement Underlayment DIVISON 04 – MASONRY (Not Used) DIVISION 05 –METALS Section 055000 Metal Fabrication DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 075216 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing

077200 Roof Accessories 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078446 Joint Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants 079219 Acoustical Joint Sealants

Drew University Hall Of Sciences Laboratory 129 and 133 Renovation NK Project No.2199.000

INDEX - 2

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS Section 081113 Hollow Metal Frames

081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092900 Gypsum Board 095123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096516 Resilient Sheet Flooring 099123 Interior Painting

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 101100 Visual Display Units DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 115213 Projection Screens

115300 Laboratory Equipment 115313 Laboratory Fume Hoods 115343 Service Fittings and Accessories

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 123553.19 Wood Laboratory Casework DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Not Used) DIVISIONS 20 through 28, – MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL (Not Used) Specifications for these sections can be found on drawings SITE WORK SECTIONS 31 – 33 (Not Used)

END OF INDEX



INDEX - 3

This page intentionally left blank



SUMMARY 011000-1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Owner-furnished products. 7. Access to site. 8. Coordination with occupants. 9. Work restrictions. 10. Specification and drawing conventions. 11. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The Project consists of the interior fit-out of two laboratories of approximately xxxx s.f. together with mechanical and electrical work required by the Contract Documents.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.


SUMMARY 011000-2

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other contract documents, including drawings, which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in contract documents are defined generally in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of contract documents.

B. General requirements apply to the entire work of the Contract and, where so indicated, to other elements which are included in the project.

C. Where the term “Architect” is used this shall designate the firm of:

Nadaskay Kopelson Architects 95 Washington Street Morristown, NJ 07960

D. The term “indicated” is a cross reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “indicated”, it is for the purpose of helping to locate a cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended, except as specifically noted.

E. Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted”, and “permitted” mean “directed by Architect”, “requested by Architect”, etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect’s responsibility into the Contractor’s area of construction supervision.

F. Where used in conjunction with Architect’s response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term “approved” will be held to limitations of the Architect’s responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will “approval” by the Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of the Contract documents.

G. Whenever the words “or approved equal” are used it shall be understood to indicate that the Architect will entertain substitutions for the product and/or manufacturer named in the Specifications. Contractor shall redesign any associated mechanical, electrical or plumbing items at no additional cost to the project if the substitute is accepted. It shall be further understood that the judgment of “equality” rests solely with the Architect. Equipment, products, materials, etc. will be judged on the following basis:

1. Ability to fit into space provided. 2. Quality. 3. Serviceability 4. Aesthetics 5. Availability of finishes 6. Workmanship 7. Economy of operation



SUMMARY 011000-3

8. Suitability for purpose intended

H. The project site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of the Work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the project site is shown on the Drawings, and may or may not be identical with description of the land upon which the project is to be built.

I. Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term “furnish” is used to mean supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, upacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

J. Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term “install” is used to describe operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

K. Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term “provide” means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

L. An installer is the entity, person or firm, engaged by the Contractor or his subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is required that such installers be experts in operations they are engaged to perform.

M. The testing laboratory is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at project site or elsewhere; and to report and interpret results of those inspections or tests.

N. Where the works such as “The Contractor shall” and similar words are omitted, the sentence structure shall be considered to include such words since the Specifications are directional in nature, indicating work to be performed by the Contractor.

O. The term “Subcontractor” is used hereinafter only to delineate the work of the various trades. The term “Subcontractor” shall not be construed as a firm direction to subcontract a particular Section of the Work.

P. “Piping” includes, in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories related to such piping.

Q. “Concealed” means hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, or embedded in construction.

R. “Exposed” means “not concealed” as defined above. Work in trenches, crawl spaces, and tunnels shall be considered “exposed” unless otherwise specifically noted.

S. Damage: Any sort of deterioration whether due to weather, normal wear and tear, accident, or abuse, resulting in soiling, marring, breakage, corrosion, rotting, or impairment of function.


SUMMARY 011000-4

1.6 KNOWLEDGE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor and his subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and materialmen shall consult in detail the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, all Divisions and Sections of the Specifications, all Drawings and all Addenda for instructions and requirements pertaining to the Work, and at this and their cost, shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish, install and complete the work in strict conformance with all provisions thereof.

B. The Contractor will be held to have examined the site of the Work prior to submitting his proposal and informed himself, his Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and materialmen of all existing conditions affecting the execution of the work.

C. The Contractor will be held to have examined the Contract Documents, and Modifications thereto, as they may affect subdivisions of the work and informed himself, his Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and materialmen of all conditions thereof affecting the execution of the Work.

D. The Contractor will be held to be thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting labor in the neighborhood of the Project including, but not limited to, Union rules, Department of Labor rules, incentive pay, procurement, living and commuting conditions and to have informed his Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors thereof.

E. The Specifications and Drawings shall be considered as a whole and shall not be separated during the bidding or construction period. Division of specifications into Divisions and Sections is solely for organization and is not intended to define trade responsibilities, unless specifically stated. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work and, if he divides the Drawings or Specifications for use of subcontracts and material suppliers, he does so at his own risk.

1.7 MATERIALS

A. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, mounting brackets, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect, whether specified and/or shown, or not.

B. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

C. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.



SUMMARY 011000-5

1.8 STANDARDS

A. Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is specified by reference to a governmental, trade association or similar standard, it shall comply with the requirements of the latest publication thereof and amendments thereto in effect on the bid date.

B. Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect, and are made a part of Contract Documents by reference, as if copied directly into Contract documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith.

C. Where compliance with 2 or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement, which is generally recognized to be also most costly, is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the Contract Documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently equal but different requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. Except for overlapping or conflicting requirements, where more than one set of requirements are specified for a particular unit of work, option is intended to be Contractor’s regardless of whether specifically indicated as such.

D. Reference standards referenced directly in Contract Documents or by governing regulations have precedence over nonreference standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to work.

1.9 REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable requirements, regulations and codes.

1.10 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. Work includes but is not limited to Audio Visual terminations and installations, security terminations and installations, and door hardware.

1.11 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. The Owner will contract with a vendor to provide and install furniture. The Contractor shall allow free access to the jobsite and building for the furniture vendors’ installers.


SUMMARY 011000-6

Conduct a walk-through of the building with furniture installer and FDU project manager in order to identify and document defects in building finishes. Damage to project occurring during furniture installation shall be repaired by the G.C. and paid for by the furniture installer.

1.12 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

D. Project may be staged on site.

1.13 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.14 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.



SUMMARY 011000-7

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: As approved in advance by Owner and in conformance with local ordinance.

2. Early Morning Hours: As approved in advance by Owner and in conformance with local ordinance.

3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As approved in advance by Owner. 4. Hours for Core Drilling: Midnight to 8:00 a.m. unless otherwise approved by the Owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. 3. Utilities include, but are not limited to: Water, power, gas services, mechanical,

sprinkler, and fire alarm.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Hot Work: Any hot work will require 3 day notification. This will require a fire watch, coordinated through public safety.

F. Sprinkler and Fire Alarm Work: Sprinkler and fire alarm will require 3 day notification to Drew University’s Facility for coordination with vendor. This will require a fire watch, coordinated through public safety.

G. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

H. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted.

1.15 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:


SUMMARY 011000-8

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

1.16 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS INFORMATION

A. The Contract Documents are prepared in accordance with available information as to existing conditions and locations. If, during construction, conditions are revealed at variance with the Contract Documents, notify the Architect immediately so that supplementary instructions may be issued.

B. The Specifications determine the kinds and methods of installation of the various materials, the Drawings establish the quantities, dimensions and details of materials, the schedules on the Drawings, give the location, type and extent of the materials.

C. In case of any discrepancy between the various Drawings, or between various parts of the Specifications or between Drawings and specifications, the matter shall immediately be submitted to the Architect and for Contractual purposes, the most expensive condition shall apply.

D. Dimensions given on the Drawings govern scale measurements and large scale drawings govern small scale drawings, except as to anything omitted unless such omission is expressly noted on the larger scale drawings.

E. The techniques or methods of specifying to record requirements varies throughout text, and may include “prescriptive”, “open generic/descriptive”, “compliance with standards”, “performance”, “proprietary”, or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit or work has no bearing on requirements for another unit or work.

F. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number in the Contract Documents, it shall be the same as referring to it in the plural. As many such materials, articles or pieces of equipment shall be provided as are required to complete the Work.



SUMMARY 011000-9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


SUMMARY 011000-10




SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.



b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

B. Substitutions may be permitted by the Architect, if, in his opinion, the requirements of the proposed substitution comply with the requirements specified for the material, article or piece of equipment; however, the Architect is not required to permit substitutions pursuant to the case of Whitten Corporation vs. Massachusetts, April 12, 1974, affirmed by the Federal First Circuit Court, December 14, 1974.




C. The Architect has no obligation, after award of contract, to consider any brand other than those named in the Contract Documents. However, the Contractor may submit substitutes to the Architect for review, fully documented and certified, and accompanied by his proposal for a deduction in the Contract Sum.

D. Contractors’ request for substitutions will be received and considered when extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required and changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents; when timely, fully documented to show compliance with all aspects of the specified item and properly submitted; and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by Architect. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Where request is directly related to an “or approved equal” clause or other language of same effect in contract documents.

2. Where required product, material or method cannot be provided within Contract Time, but not as a result of Contractors’ failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate various activities properly.

3. Where required product, material or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, or cannot be properly coordinated there within, or cannot be warranted (guaranteed) as required, or cannot be used without adversely affecting Owners’ insurance coverage on completed work, or will encounter other substantial noncompliance which are not possible to otherwise overcome except by making requested substitution, which Contractor thereby certifies to overcome such incompatibility or other noncompliance as claimed.

4. Where required product, material or method cannot receive required approval by a governing authority, and requested substitution can be so approved.

5. Where substantial advantage is offered Owner, in terms of cost, time or other valuable considerations, after deducting offsetting responsibilities Owner may be required to bear, including additional compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other work by Owner or separate Contractors, and similarly considerations.

6. Substitutions will be allowed for equipment or materials no longer manufactured.

E. Contractors’ submittal of, and Architects’ acceptance of, shop drawings, product data or samples which indicate work not complying with requirements of Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable and valid request for, nor approval of, a substitution.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.



1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.




b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.





CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 -1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on the Architects’ "Architect's Supplemental Instructions" form.

1.4 CONTRACTOR INITIATED PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. If latent or Changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.



6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Per Owner Agreement.

1.5 CHANGE REQUESTS

A. Change Requests: Architect may issue a Change Request. Change Request instructs the Contractor to prepare pricing for the described change of work and is not a directive to proceed with the work. Upon review of the proposal, the Architect and Owner will determine if the work will be accepted as a change to the Contract Documents.

1. Work Change Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

3. Construction Change Request contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.6 CHANGE DIRECTIVES

A. Change Directive: Architect may issue a Change Directive on Architects’ “Change Directive” form provided on request. Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Contractor will submit Change Order per the Contractor/Owner Agreement.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.



1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.




a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Submit as per Contractor/Owner Agreement.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.



3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit as per the Contractor/Owner Agreement.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data. 4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).




5. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.

6. Products list (preliminary if not final). 7. Sustainable design action plans. 8. Schedule of unit prices. 9. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 10. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 11. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 12. Copies of building permits. 13. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 14. Initial progress report. 15. Report of preconstruction conference.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.






PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 -1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Project Web site. 4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.



B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.




1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.



6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures” unless coordination was done digintally.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings.

2. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project.

a. Perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements by Architect.

3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.




a. Refer to Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures” for release of media to Contractor.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Sustainable design requirements. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability.



v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.




5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.



a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.



REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION 013110 - 1

SECTION 013110 – REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 30 calendar days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.



1.5 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. General RFI Procedure Requirements:

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site / Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

a. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.




1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to the General Conditions.

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within 21 days of receipt of the RFI response. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.






CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.



C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.




F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.



4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site.




5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At biweekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.



B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.



D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.




b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in the current version of AutoCAD or Revit.

c. Drawings shall be forwarded only upon receipt of signed acceptance of terms form. Acceptance forms are available from the Architect.

d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans.

2. These files will be issued for the convenience of the Contractor or trade and the Contractor or trade remains responsible for all contract requirements related to the normal shop drawing preparation process.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

a. Submittals received later than 1:00pm via ground delivery will be considered received the next business day.

b. Submittals received later than 3:00pm via electronic delivery will be considered received the next business day.

2. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 business days for initial review of each submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 business days for review of each resubmittal.



D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a sequential number and revision number (e.g., AAA 30 061000 0001 00). Submittals shall be numbered sequentially after next open number in the sequence (e.g., AAA 30 061000 0002 00). The last two digits shall represent the submission number, 0 for initial, 1 for first resubmittal (e.g., AAA 30 061000 0001 01), etc.…

b. For projects submitting through Newforma, submittal numbering shall be input beginning with the specification section number, and the program will automatically sequence under that number.

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. t. Refer to sample checklist in Section 4 for additional items to be incorporated into

the Form.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested




by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

J. Additional Copies: Contractor shall furnish all required hard copies for permits, delegated design submittals as may be required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, or other entities as may be required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site / Architect's FTP site (Newforma) specifically established for Project.


2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.


3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.



a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.




2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing



color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record/control sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure




Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.



W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

C. All delegated design submittals will be reviewed by the Architect.

1. Delegated design submittals required to be submitted AHJ shall first be reviewed by the Architect. Upon successful completion of review, the Architect shall return the submittal to the Contractor who will then submit to the Code Official for review.

2. The following submittals require review by the Authority Having Jurisdiction:

a. Section 210000 – Fire Protection.

b. Section 280000 – Fire Alarm System.

D. Review of roofing submittals.

1. All roofing submittals as one package including the following sections:

a. Section 075216 – SBS Membrane Roof

b. Section 077200 – Roof Accessories

c. Section 076200 – Roof Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim




2. Submittal shall be complete, including (but not limited to) product data, submittals, shop drawings and details. Incomplete submittals will be rejected and returned without review.

a. Contractor shall also provide coordinated flashing details due to overlapping trade work with the masonry and cast stone work. Details shall be submitted well in advance of Work.

E. FM Global review of submittals.

1. Submittals required to be reviewed by Factory Mutual Global shall first be reviewed by the Architect and Owner per item C. Upon approval of Architect, Owner and the Code Official, the submittal must then be submitted to FM Global for review. Allow at least one month for FM Global review of each required submittal.

2. The following submittals require review by Factory Mutual Global:

a. All roofing submittals as one package including the following sections:

1) Section 075423 – Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roof

2) Section 076200 – Roof Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

3) Section 077100 – Manufactured Roof Accessories

4) Section 077200 – Roof Accessories

b. Section 074212 – Formed Metal Wall Panels

c. Section 074213 – Metal Composite Material Wall Panels

d. Section 213000 – Fire Protection

e. Section 212216 – Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

F. Review of roofing submittals.

1. All roofing submittals as one package including the following sections:

a. Section 072200 – Roof and Deck Insulation

b. Section 075423 – Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roof

c. Section 076200 – Roof Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

d. Section 077100 –Roof Specialties

e. Section 077200 – Roof Accessories

2. Submittal shall be complete, including (but not limited to) product data, submittals, shop drawings and details. Incomplete submittals will be rejected and returned without review.



a. Contractor shall also provide coordinated flashing details due to overlapping trade work with the masonry and cast stone work. Details shall be submitted well in advance of Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. action, as follows:

1. “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”: If the drawings are in full compliance with all Contract Documents or if the indicated deviations are acceptable.

a. Equivalent Engineers’ Stamp: “REVIEWED”. Reviewed and found generally acceptable, minor deviations may be noted. no further submittal required if notations are complied with

2. “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”: If drawings have corrections which must be made. Subsequently one of the following actions shall be taken by the Contractor:

a. “FAB. & CONST. MAY PROCEED”: If corrections are minor and not significant enough to require resubmission. Noted corrections must be made in the final installation. 1) Equivalent Engineers’ Stamp: “REVIEWED”. Reviewed and found

generally acceptable, minor deviations may be noted. no further submittal required if notations are complied with

b. “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”: If resubmission is required due to the nature or number of corrections. 1) Equivalent Engineers’ Stamp: “REVIEWED, DEVIATIONS NOTED:

REVISE AND RESUBMIT”. Submittal contains deviations which shall be corrected and confirmed by a new submittal.




3. “REJECTED”: If shop drawings do not meet contract requirements. Resubmission of shop drawings which meet contract requirements are required.

1) Equivalent Engineers’ Stamp: “REJECTED”.

4. “REVIEWED”: For items submitted for record only, or delegated design submittals that are provided with the Contractors’ Engineer signature and seal.

5. “NO ACTION”: Engineers’ stamp only. Submittal not reviewed.

B. Work shall be executed in accordance with “No Exception Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted, Fabrication & Construction May Proceed” drawings only.

C. Architects’ review of shop drawings will constitute checking for general arrangement only, and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complete compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for quantities and dimensions to assure a proper fit under field conditions.

D. Review of submittals and calculations bearing the seal of a professional engineer will be reviewed for design intent and check for conformance with design criteria only.

E. Submittals marked “No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted – Fabrication and Construction May Proceed” in conjunction with “Revise and Resubmit” are acceptable for fabrication and construction, but a resubmittal is required for record purposes only.

F. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

G. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

H. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

I. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

3.3 COLOR SELECTIONS

A. All colors for all finished surfaces and materials will be selected or approved by Architect. The colour selections will be made at one time to provide a complete and coordinated colour schedule which, upon acceptance of the Owner, will be provided to the Contractor.

B. It is imperative that all colour information be submitted to the Architect by the Contractor before colour selections can be made. If any colour selection information is not available when colors are needed to meet the project schedule, the Architect will select colors from one of the named manufacturers in the Specifications, and the Contractor will be required to exactly match that colour. A claim for delay will not be accepted if the colour schedule is late due to the



failure of the Contractor to provide the Architect with all required colour information, nor will an extra be entertained if the selected colour is not available from the Manufacturer the Contractor intended to use but neglected to submit.

PART 4 - SAMPLE CHECKLIST

4.1 SUMMARY

A. Information below is sample material only. Refer to Section 1.5 “SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS” for additional requirements.

INFORMATION AND CHECKLIST

1. Direct contact information for product representative or supplier to which questions can be referred (name, address, phone number and email address).

Comment 2. Are all specified or scheduled

items included and exactly match scheduled/specified items?

Yes No ___________________________________________

3. Is this item a substitution? Yes No ___________________________________________ 4. Are deviations clearly identified? Yes No ___________________________________________ 5. Does item fit space shown on

construction documents, coordination drawings, and actual field conditions?

Yes No ___________________________________________

6. Does this material/equipment add expense to other trades or project costs?

Yes No ___________________________________________

7. Is control interface coordinated? Yes No ___________________________________________ 8. List electrical charateristics

(V/Ph/Hz/A). ___________________________________________




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.



D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:




1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.



3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.




F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.



2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.




1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these



operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

B. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.




C. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

D. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624 mm).

E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Owner will schedule conference room for weekly progress meetings.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials at location(s) as directed by Owner.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.




2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

E. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,



restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

F. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.




1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

2. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required. 4. Protect air-handling equipment. 5. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Temporary Fire Protection shall be as indicated in the Contractor/Owner Agreement.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.



3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 3. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.




A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:




1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.



2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics




that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.





EXECUTION 017300-1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

4. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


EXECUTION 017300-2

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements may include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.



EXECUTION 017300-3

i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Equipment supports. d. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. e. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.


EXECUTION 017300-4

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.

B. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.



EXECUTION 017300-5

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.


EXECUTION 017300-6

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.



EXECUTION 017300-7

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.


EXECUTION 017300-8

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.



EXECUTION 017300-9

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



EXECUTION 017300-10




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.


1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordination of responsibilities for waste management.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.



1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Concrete. b. Concrete reinforcing steel. c. Concrete masonry units. d. Plywood and oriented strand board. e. Miscellaneous steel. f. Rough hardware. g. Roofing. h. Insulation. i. Doors and frames. j. Door hardware. k. Glazing. l. Metal studs. m. Gypsum board. n. Acoustical tile and panels. o. Equipment. p. Cabinets. q. Plumbing fixtures. r. Piping. s. Supports and hangers. t. Valves. u. Sprinklers. v. Mechanical equipment. w. Refrigerants. x. Electrical conduit. y. Copper wiring. z. Lighting fixtures. aa. Lamps. bb. Ballasts. cc. Electrical devices. dd. Switchgear and panelboards. ee. Transformers.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Lumber. b. Wood sheet materials. c. Metals. d. Roofing. e. Insulation.




f. Gypsum board. g. Piping. h. Electrical conduit. i. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.


A. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

B. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

C. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

D. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

E. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.




A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.




2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

F. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

G. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.



3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

B. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

C. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

D. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Miscellaneous Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

E. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

F. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

G. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

H. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

I. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.




C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.




CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.



C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owners’ signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.




3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to the Contractor/Owner Agreement. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.



1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. The Architect will furnish a form to the Contractor for their use in preparing the punch list.

5. Architect will not perform the initial punch list inspection. The Contractor must complete the list in order for the Architects to review.

a. The following items would deem the space to be inspected not ready for Punch List. 1) If the area has contracted work not in place. 2) Stored materials are in the area. 3) Final painting has not been performed.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.




D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films,

and similar foreign substances. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.



h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

m. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:



1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:




1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:



1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:




1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.



D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.




E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,



identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 4. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints.



B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing.




i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: DWG, Version curernt, Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.



b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file, or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file andpaper copy.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.




DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 -1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:



a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. Include in the same media delivery device as the video.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:



a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions.




c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of [an oral] [a written] [a demonstration] performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.



3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to.mp4 format file type or other format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,

stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.




F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.




GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413-1

SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings. Underlayment shall be applied where resilient flooring is scheduled. Limit of application shall be determined based upon field conditions.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certifying that products are compatible.

C. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C).

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Allied Custom Gypsum; AccuCrete, AccuRadiant. b. Ardex; GS-4 Self-Leveling Repair Underlayment, LU-100 Self-Leveling Flooring

Underlayment. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Flo-Top.

2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,

formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1245&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456817403&mf=04&src=wd






B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.




METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.



C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33

(Grade 230); 016 gauge minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, thermoset epoxy.

F. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

H. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

I. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.




2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.



1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

H. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.




F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.



2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.




3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.




MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 -1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.




A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.




1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. Contractor may use this type for interior.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a painted, stained, or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.



E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat all interior miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. items indicated on Drawings, and may include the following:

1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.




2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 ICC-ES AC58 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.



1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.




I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.




PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.


1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include samples of tags as indicated in 3.4.B “Identification”.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>

C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=12



or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:




1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. d. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa).

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11857

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457006169








F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.




2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.



1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Refer to Section 101420 “Code Required Signage” for additional information.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.




3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Penetration Firestopping Systems with No Penetrating Items:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 0070. 2. F-Rating: 2 hour. 3. T-Rating: 2 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Maximum Opening Size: 7 inches.

C. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (at metal framed drywall partitions):

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-1054. 2. F-Rating: 1 and 2 hour. 3. T-Rating: 0 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Penetrants: Maximum 30 inch schedule 10 or heavier steel pipe; Maximum 30 inch

service weight or heavier cast iron pipe; Maximum 6 inch conduit; Maximum 4 inch EMT; Maximum 6 inch Type L or heavier copper pipe.

D. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (at concrete or CMU floors or partitions):

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1109. 2. F-Rating: 2 and 3 hour. 3. T-Rating: 0 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Penetrants: Maximum 4 inch rigid galvanized steel conduit; Maximum 4 steel electrical

metallic tubing; Maximum 4 inch Schedule 10 or heavier steel pipe.

E. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:



1. UL-Classified Systems: F-A- 2067. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. T-Rating: 1 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Penetrants: Maximum 4 inch schedule 40 PVC pipe; Maximum 4 inch Schedule 40 ABS

pipe; Maximum 4 inch SDR 13.5 CPVC pipe; Maximum 4 inch Schedule 40 FRPP pipe.

F. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: F-B-2029. 2. F-Rating: 3 hour. 3. T-Rating: 0 and 2 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Penetrants: Maximum 4 inch schedule 40 PVC pipe; Maximum 4 inch Schedule 40 ABS

pipe; Maximum 4 inch SDR 13.5 CPVC pipe; Maximum 4 inch Schedule 40 rigid nonmetallic pipe.

G. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Electrical Cables (at metal framed drywall partitions):

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-1243. 2. F-Rating: 1 and 2 hour. 3. T-Rating: 0 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Penetrants: Maximum 2 inch diameter aluminum or steel flexible metal conduit.

H. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants (at metal framed drywall partitions):

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-3047. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 3/4 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 5. Penetrants: Maximum 7/C No. 12 AWG cables with PVC jacket and insulation.

Maximum opening diameter of 6 inches.

I. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-7040. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour, 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 1 hour, 2 hours. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

J. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-8014. 2. F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]. 3. T-Rating: 0 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.




5. Penetrants: Maximum 36 inch x 4 inch cable tray, Nominal 12 inch (or smaller) schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe, nominal 1 inch (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe, nominal 4 inch or smaller steel EMT or 6 inch conduit, nominal 6 inch (or smaller) regular (or heavier) copper pipe, maximum 4 inch cable bundle.

6. Pipe Coverings: Nominal 1-1/2 inch thick hollow cylindrical heavy density glass fiber jackets with metal jackets.




JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1

SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers and for wall identification.

2. Section 079100 "Preformed Joint Seals" for preformed foam and extruded-silicone fire-resistive joint seals.

3. Section 079500 "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive architectural joint systems. 4. Section 079513.13 "Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for fire-resistive

manufactured expansion-joint cover assemblies for interior floors, walls, and ceilings. 5. Section 079513.16 "Exterior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for fire-resistive

manufactured expansion-joint cover assemblies for exterior building walls, soffits, and parapets.

6. Section 079513.19 "Parking Deck Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for fire-resistive manufactured expansion-joint cover assemblies subject to vehicular traffic.

7. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed partition heads.





1. Include samples of tags as indicated in 3.4 “Identification”.



B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.



B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. d. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company. e. Tremco, Inc.

C. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.

D. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide joint firestopping systems with rating determined per ASTM E 2307.

1. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.

E. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa).









F. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>

G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.






1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish

to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393.

B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Bottom-of-Gypsum Wall-to-Concrete Floor, Joint Firestopping Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: BW- S- 0001.

C. Bottom-of-Gypsum/Gypsum Shaft Wall-to-Concrete Floor, Joint Firestopping Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: BW- S- 0016.

D. Gypsum Wall-to-Flat Concrete Floor (Top-of-Wall), Joint Firestopping Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: HW- D- 0016.

E. Gypsum Shaft Wall-to- Top-of-Wall, Joint Firestopping Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: HW- D- 0119.

F. Gypsum Wall-to-Concrete Over Fluted Metal Deck (Top-of-Wall), Joint Firestopping Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0042, HW-D-0264.




JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:

a. Joints between different materials listed above. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of windows. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. f. Other joints as indicated.

3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated.


1. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction.






A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested:

1. Joint-sealant location and designation. 2. Manufacturer and product name. 3. Type of substrate material. 4. Proposed test. 5. Number of samples required.

D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

E. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.




B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.



4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of joint sealants with cleaning of joint sealant substrates and other operations that may impact installation or finished joint sealant work.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Final Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

D. Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Exterior Silicone Sealants: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that demonstrate deterioration or failure under normal use within warranty period specified.

1. Warranty Period for Silicone Sealants: 20 years date of Final Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.




C. Definitions: Definitions below are taken from ASTM C 920.

1. Type S: Single component, typically air or moisture cured. 2. Type M: Two or more components chemically cured. 3. Grade P: Pourable/self-leveling sealant. 4. Grade NS: Nosag sealants. 5. Classes: The number represents the percent of contraction or expansion of the original

joint width.

a. 12-1/2: Nonmoving-type joints to joints with minimal movement. b. 25: Joints designed for moderate amount of movement. c. 35: Joints designed for moderate amount of movement. d. 50: Joints designed for moderate amount of movement. Typically used in building

façade systems and glazing. e. 100/50: Sealant capable of handling movement of 50% contraction and 100%

expansion. Joints designed for high amounts of movement; commonly used in facades of buildings in high-wind and/or seismic regions

6. Use T (Traffic): Sealants used in joints subjected to vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 7. Use NT (Nontraffic): Used in horizontal joints not exposed to traffic, and for joints in

walls, around fenestration, etc. 8. Use I (Immersible): Sealants designed for use in areas subjected to water immersion. 9. Use (related to material):

a. M: Sealants used in contact with mortar b. G: Sealants used in contact with glass c. A: Sealants used in contact with aluminum d. O: Sealants used in contact with all other materials other than those previously

listed.

2.2 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT #S-43: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. With fungicide.


a. The Dow Chemical Company Corporation. DOWSIL 786 Silicone Sealant. b. GE Construction Sealants; SC S1700 Sanitary. c. Pecora Corporation. 898NST d. Sika Corporation; Sikasil GP e. Tremco Incorporated. Tremsil 600.








2. Locations: Joints between walls and epoxy counters. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters, Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: Clear.

C. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 50, NT #S-44: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether sealant joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. With fungicide.


a. BASF Corporation; MasterSeal NP 150 (formerly Sonolastic 150 VLM) b. Silco International; ECO-FLEX 9500

2. Locations: Joints between walls and epoxy counters. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters, Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

3. Uses: M, A, and, as applicable to joints indicated, O. 4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex #S-49: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. c. Pecora Corporation. AC-20+ d. The Sherwin Williams Company; 950A e. Sika Corporation; Sika Bondaflex Sil A 700 f. Tremco Incorporated. Tremflex 834

2. Locations: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows, perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and elevator entrances.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.















B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning



operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems. e. <Insert other porous joint substrate>.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. <Insert other nonporous joint substrate>.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.




D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform [10] <Insert number> tests for the first [1000 feet (300 m)] <Insert dimension> of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each [1000 feet (300 m)] <Insert dimension> of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of



product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 INTERIOR JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement[ JS-1].

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: #S-49. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.




B. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces[ JS-2].

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: #S-43 or #S-44. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.




ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 1

SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl-rubber-based joint sealants for nonacoustical applications.


A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.


a. GE Construction Sealants; RCS20 Acoustical. b. Hilti, Inc.; Smoke and Acoustical Sealant CP 506 c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant e. United States Gypsum Company; USG Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant

2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber acoustical sealant.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers, in addition to the ones listed above, offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Pecora Corporation. b. Serious Energy Inc. QuietSeal Pro Acoustical Sealant














A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint



sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Openings and penetrations through STC rated partitions. b. Perimeter ceiling grids, during installation.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed Acoustical Joint Sealants.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Penetrations through partitions in concealed spaces. b. Top and bottom of partition, drywall to structure.

2. Joint Sealant: Synthetic-rubber. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.




HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 - 1

SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel frames.


1. Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors” for wood doors installed in hollow metal frames. 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 3. Section? Elec Access

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:



1. Elevations of each frame type, including hardware mounting locations.. 2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 4. Details of each different wall opening condition. 5. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For hollow-metal frames with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.

E. Hollow metal shop drawings will not be reviewed by the Architect unless accompanied or preceded by the hardware and glazing schedules.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. L.I.F. Industries, Inc.








4. Mesker Door Inc. 5. Pioneer Industries. 6. Republic Doors and Frames. 7. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.


A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Interior Frames: SDI A250.8. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 16 gauge up to 4’-0” (1220 mm) wide. All interior frames over 4’-0” (1220 mm) wide for doors in pairs and multiple openings shall be 14 gauge.

2. Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. 3. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches (610 mm) of frame height above 7 feet (2.1 m).

3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.







C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment.

D. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

C. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding, or by rigid mechanical anchors.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal frames for hardware.




C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal frames.

3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840.

B. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

1. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

2. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.



C. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.

D. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

1. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

E. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

F. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

G. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

H. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.




FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with faces. 2. Hollow-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for wood doors. 2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,



provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Wood Doors; ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 6. VT Industries Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating

indicated. 2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated

without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

E. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, or Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware.

F. Mineral-Core Doors:










1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated asneeded to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf (2440 N) per WDMA T.M.-10.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Match existing. 3. Cut: Match existing. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. Select veneer, no cathedraling permitted. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces

and covering edges of faces - edge Type B. 8. Core: Particleboard and Structural composite lumber. 9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and

metal glazing clips approved for such use.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.




1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV

curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Staining: Match existing. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill

the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.



2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors (for fire rated doors): Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. b. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge

edges.

2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.




ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113-1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.

C. Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:


a. Acudor Products, Inc.





b. Babcock-Davis. c. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Company; a division of Acorn Engineering

Company. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory primed. 5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 6. Lock: Prepared for mortise cylinder.

B. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Manufacturer shall be the same as selected in section A. 2. Description: Door face recessed 5/8 inch (16 mm) for gypsum board infill; with

concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces within public corridors, lobbies, conference rooms

and seminar rooms.. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory primed. 5. Lock: Prepared for mortise cylinder.

2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Manufacturer shall be the same as selected in section A. 2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed

in sheet metal; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 5. Temperature-Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes. 6. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch (0.91 mm), 20 gage, factory primed. 7. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 8. Latch and Lock: Self-closing, self-latching door hardware, prepared for mortise cylinder.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.











D. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. Provide access sleeves for each latch operator and install in holes cut through finish.

E. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 3. Mortise Cylinder Preparation: Where indicated, prepare door panel to accept cylinder

specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.



1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

2. Finish all surfaces of trim and frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.




FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113.13 - 1

SECTION 084113.13 – FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Fire rated glazing and framing systems for installation as sidelights, windows, and

transoms in interior openings

B. Related Sections:

2. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications:” Steel attachment members inserts and anchors 3. Section 078400 “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other fire

resistive assemblies. 4. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Frames.” Hollow Metal doors prepped for the work of

this section. 5. Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors” for fire-rated doors. 6. Section 087100 “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the work

of this section

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 2603-2002 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

2. AAMA 2604 -2005 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

3. AAMA 2605 -2005 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. Fire safety related:

a. ASTM E119: Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

2. Material related

a. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2007.



b. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2006b.

C. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2007

D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.

1. BHMA A156 - American National Standards for door hardware; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156).

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction & Materials 3. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 4. NFPA 257: Fire Test of Window Assemblies

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 2. UL 10 B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 3. UL 10 C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window & Door Assemblies 4. UL 263: Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials 5. UL-752 Ratings of Bullet-Resistant Materials

G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings

H. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):

1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

I. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2005

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass, fabricated glass or framing as defined in referenced glazing publications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:




1. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product descriptions, technical data, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listings and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations and details of product showing component dimensions; framing opening requirements, dimensions, tolerances, and attachment to structure

2. Provide templates for the location of embeds and anchor locations required for any adjoining work (if applicable).

C. Structural Calculations:

1. Provide structural calculations sealed by a licensed professional engineer in the State in which the project is located; prepared in compliance with referenced documents and these specifications.

D. Samples. For following products:

1. Glass sample-as provided by manufacturer 2. Sample of frame 3. Verification of sample of selected finish

E. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

F. Warranties: Submit manufacturer’s warranty.

G. Certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements.

1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualifications according to

1. International Accreditation Service for a Type A Third-Party Inspection Body (Field Services ICC-ES Third-Party Inspections Standard Operating Procedures, 00-BL-S0400 and S0401)

B. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are classified and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 and UL 9.



C. Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies: Assemblies complying with ASTM E119 that are classified and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing in accordance with UL 263, ASTM E119.

D. Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by Underwriters Laboratories maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer.


A. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of other sections.

1. Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop drawings.

B. Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to: other interior components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturers’ standard five-year manufacturer warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer Glazing Material: “Pilkington Pyrostop” fire-rated glazing as manufactured by the Pilkington Group and distributed by Technical Glass Products.

B. Frame System: “Fireframes Aluminum Series” fire-rated frame system as manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products.

C. Substitutions: Substitutions for Glazing Material and Frame System not permitted.


A. System Description:

1. Steel fire-rated glazed wall and/or window system, dual aluminum cover cap format




a. Face widths available:

1) 2” 2) Custom extruded aluminum cover caps 3) Custom stainless steel cover caps

b. Duration – Windows Capable of providing a fire rating for [45], [60], [120]

minutes. c. Duration – Walls: Capable of providing a fire rating for [60], [120] minutes.

B. Delegated design: For the performance requirements listed below requiring structural design provide data, calculations and drawings signed and sealed by an engineer licensed in the state [province] where the project is located.

C. Design Requirements

1. Design and size the system to withstand structural forces placed upon it without damage or permanent set when tested in accordance with ASTM E330 using load 1.5 times the design wind loads and of 10 seconds in duration at +/- 10 PSF.

2.3 MATERIALS - GLASS

A. Fire Rated Glazing: Composed of multiple sheets of Pilkington Optiwhite™ high visible light transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer.

B. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201(Cat. I and II).

C. Properties Interior Glazing Property Fire Rating 45 minute 60 minute 120 minute

Manufacturer’s designation 45-200 60-101 60-201 120-106 Glazing type single single single IGU Nominal Thickness 3/4” (19mm) 7/8” (23mm) 1-1/16”

(27mm) 2-1/4” (57mm)

Weight in lbs/sf 9.2 10.85 12.5 22.9 Daylight Transmission 86 87% 86% 75% Sound Transmission Coefficient

40dB 41dB 44dB 46dB

Architects’ Designation GR-1 GR-2 GR-3 GR-4

D. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL), fire rating period, safety glazing standards, and date of manufacture.



E. Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard compression gaskets, standoff, spacers, setting blocks and other accessories necessary for a complete installation.

2.4 MATERIALS –ALUMINUM FRAMES

A. Aluminum Framing System [45 min. 60 min. 120 min.]

1. Steel Frame: The steel framing members are made of two halves, nom. 1.9 in. wide (48.3 mm) with a nom. minimum depth of 1.38 in. (35 mm) with lengths cut according to glazing size.

2. Aluminum Trim: Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. 2 in. (50.8 mm) wide with a nom. depth of 1.54 in. (39 mm) with lengths cut according to glazing size.

3. Stainless Steel Standoffs: Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter with a nom. minimum depth of 1 1/8 in. (28 mm) with depth adjusted to match Pilkington Pyrostop panel thickness.

4. Stainless Steel Moment and Connecting Braces: Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom 3/8 in. (10 mm) thick with a nom. minimum depth of 1 1/8 in. (28 mm) with depth adjusted to match Pilkington Pyrostop® Panel thickness.

5. Framing Member Fasteners: Supplied with the steel framing members. Screws are M6 x16mm Button Head Socket Cap Screws for frame assembly and #6 x 1” Pan Head Sheet Metal Screws for door installation.

6. Glazing Gasket: Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. 3/4 in. (19 mm) by 3/16 in. (4.5 mm) black applied to the steel framing members to cushion and seal the glazing material when installed.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Obtain reviewed shop drawings prior to fabrication.

B. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate fire-rated assembly to field dimensions.

C. Factory prepared, fire-rated steel door assemblies by TGP to be prehung, prefinished with hardware preinstalled for field mounting.

D. Field glaze door and frame assemblies.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL


B. Finish frames after assembly.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.




2.7 POWDERCOAT FINISHES

A. Finish after fabrication.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

C. Interior Steel or Aluminum Finishes

1. Powder-Coat Finish: Polyester Super Durable powder coating which meets AAMA 2604 for chalking and fading. Apply manufacturer's standard powder coating finish system applied to factory-assembled frames before shipping, complying with manufacturer's recommended instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Tiger Drylac b. Additional manufacturers as approved by TGP

2.9 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates and members to which the work of this section attaches or adjoins prior to frame installation are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide openings plumb, square and within allowable tolerances. The manufacturer recommends 3/8 inch shim space at all walls

B. Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall / door system.

C. Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. See Fireframes Aluminum Series Installation Manual

3.3 REPAIR AND TOUCH UP



A. Powder Coated Finishes

1. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended products.

2. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view. 3. Repairs and touch-up not visible from a distance of 5 feet Owner and Architect to

approve.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.

3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface`. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent.

2. Do not use any of the following:

a. Steam jets b. Abrasives c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones,

alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 084113.13



DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Electronic access control system components, including:

a. Electronic access control devices.

3. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive new door hardware.

B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for:

1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold

installation specified in this section. 3. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by

this section. 4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage

wiring. 5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control

system.




1.03 REFERENCES

A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature

C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

2. ANSI/ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

D. International Building Code New Jersey Edition

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from

Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:

a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including: 1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and

security systems. 2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers.




3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include:

a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening.

c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,

electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and fire and smoke alarm connection. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with

submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

5. Key Schedule:

a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.

b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.




e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner,

by means as directed by Owner.

f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer:

a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Certificates of Compliance:

a. Certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.

b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

4. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

5. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:

a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. f. Final keying schedule g. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature h. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low

voltage and 110 volts. i. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to

identify project.





A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein.

1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,” including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note: Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.)

a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category, requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.

2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable manufacturers and products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.

B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.

a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.

C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:

1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical

engineers.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.




1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

F. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

G. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

H. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release latch. Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

J. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches (75 mm) from latch, measured to leading edge of door.

K. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, and Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant.




2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.

L. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

M. Coordination Conferences:

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.

a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor. b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting

was held and who was in attendance.

2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.

a. Attendees: electrified door hardware supplier, doors and frames supplier, electrified door hardware installer, electrical subcontractor, Owner, Architect and Contractor.

b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when coordination conference was held and who was in attendance.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.




C. Project Conditions:

1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:

1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or

repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical

agent.

E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

F. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

E. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.

a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 30 years LCN 4000 and 1460




b. Locksets: 1) Mechanical Mortise Locks: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.

c. Key Blanks: Lifetime

2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools:

1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.

1. Panic Hardware: locate between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.

B. Handles, pull, latches, locks, other operating devices:

1. Readily openable from egress side without tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist to operate

2. Force required to activate the operable parts: 5.0 pounds maximum.

C. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure at interior doors. Local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds.

D. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a point 12 degrees from the latch, measured to the landing side of the door.

1. Spring hinges: adjust for 1.5 seconds minimum for 70 degrees to fully-closed.

E. Smooth surfaces at bottom 10 inches of push sides of doors, facilitating push-open with wheelchair footrests.

F. Door opening clear width no less than 32 inches, measured from face of frame stop, or edge of inactive leaf of pair of doors, to door face with door opened to 90 degrees. Hardware projection not a factor in clear width if located above 30 inches and below 80 inches, and the hardware projects no more than 4 inches.

1. Exception: doors not requiring full passage through the opening, that is, to spaces less than 24 inches in depth, may have the clear opening width reduced to 20 inches. Example: shallow closets.




2. Door closers and overhead stops: not less than 78 inches above the finished floor or ground.

G. Thresholds: floor or landing no more than 0.50 inches below the top of the threshold of the doorway. Vertical rise no more than 0.25 inches, change in level between 0.25 inches and 0.50 inches: beveled to slope no greater than 1:2 (50 percent slope).

H. Pairs of doors: limit swing of inactive leaf to 90 degrees to protect persons reading wall-mounted tactile signage. [Pairs of doors with independently-activated hardware both leafs: limit swing of right-hand or right-hand-reverse leaf to 90 degrees to protect persons reading wall-mounted tactile signage.

I. Door and door hardware encroachment: when door is swung fully-open into means-of-egress path, the door, including the hardware, may not encroach/project more than 7 inches into the required exit width.

1. In I-2 occupancies, latch release hardware is not permitted to project in the required exit width, regardless of its mounting height.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings, the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: “No Substitute.”

1. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products will not be considered.

B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as ”Scheduled Manufacturer ” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.

C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.

E. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.




2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.

B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled.

1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations.

2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. 3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as

required to maintain fire-rating.

C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.

D. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim:

1. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable. 2. DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable. 3. Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device

manufacturer for this installation. 4. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and wire

harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices. Provide through-door wire harness for each electrified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies.

2.03 HINGES

A. Manufacturers and Products:




1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series,

Stanley FBB Series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide five-knuckle ball bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high

3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

4. 2 inches or thicker doors:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.

7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

9. Doors 36 inches (914 mm) wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high; doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) wide furnish hinges 5 inches (127 mm) high, heavy weight or standard weight as specified.

10. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component.

11. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified. 12. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge

per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.




2.04 MORTISE LOCKS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Corbin Russwin ML2000 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.

3. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 4. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide

a request to exit (RX) switch that is actuated with rotation of inside lever. 5. Provide motor based electrified locksets with electrified options as scheduled in the

hardware sets and comply with the following requirements:

a. Universal input voltage – single chassis accepts 12 or 24V DC to allow for changes in the field without changing lock chassis.

b. Fail Safe/Fail Secure – changing mode between electrically locked (fail safe) and electrically unlocked (fail secure) is field selectable without opening the lock case

c. Low maximum current draw – maximum 0.4 amps to allow for multiple locks on a single power supply.

d. Low holding current – maximum 0.01 amps to produce minimal heat, eliminate “hot levers” in electrically locked applications, and to provide reliable operation in wood doors that provide minimal ventilation and air flow.

e. Request to Exit Switch (RX) – 1) Modular Design – provide electrified locks capable of using, adding, or

changing a modular RX switch without opening the lock case. 2) Monitoring – where scheduled, provide a request to exit (RX) switch that

detects rotation of the inside lever.

f. Connections – provide quick-connect Molex system standard. g. UL Listed – 3 hour fire door

6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles.

a. Lever Design: Schlage see hardware groups b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction.

Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.




2.05 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: BEST 9K3 Series.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with a 1/2 inch (13 mm) latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.

3. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 4. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted

under roses to prevent lever sag. 5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 6. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 7. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides.

a. Lever Design: Falcon D-Dane. b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction.

Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.

c. to be hazardous.

2.06 KEYING

A. Keying System:

1. Keying system tied into existing PROVIDE MANUFACTURER keying system as directed by the Owner. Permanent Cores to be provided by Drew University

B. Keys

1. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .092-inch (2.3mm) 2. Identification:

a. Stamp keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection.

b. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.

a. Key Blanks: provide 3 per cylinder core b. Permanent Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6.




2.07 DOOR CLOSERS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 1460 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory.

2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast iron cylinder.

3. Closer Body: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter, with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat-treated pinion journal and full complement bearings.

4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.

6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.

7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: not permitted. 8. Provide stick on and special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for

arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

2.08 PROTECTION PLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood

B. Requirements:

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.

2. Sizes of plates:

a. Kick Plates: 10 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs

b. Mop Plates: 4 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs

c. Armor Plates: 36 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs

2.09 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:




1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson, Sargent

B. Requirements:

1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors.

2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors.

3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.

4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer.

2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:

1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.

2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options.

3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop.

2.11 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Reese

B. Requirements:

1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items.

2. Size of thresholds:

a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width




b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width

3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

2.12 SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:

1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for

each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified.

2.13 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: GE-Interlogix, Sargent

B. Requirements:

1. Provide recessed or surface mounted type door position switches as specified. 2. Coordinate door and frame preparations with door and frame suppliers. If switches are

being used with magnetic locking device, provide minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) between switch and magnetic locking device.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except:

1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D) 3. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28) 4. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 7. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 8. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 9. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 10. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum




11. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:

1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein.

2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for

new door hardware and with:

a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."




B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.

C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.

I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:

1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as

directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.

J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.

N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."




O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.

P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

R. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.08 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

B. Hardware Sets:




SpeXtra: 401594

Hardware Group No. 01

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIFIED HINGE EH-45 652 SEC 1 EA ELECTRIFIED LOCK ML20906 SEC PSA M92 LC 626 C-R 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74

X CAM AS REQUIRED 626 BES

1 EA PERMANENT CORE PROVIDED BY OWNER 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA FC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188FSBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05WD BLK SCE 1 EA WIRE HARNESS QC-C1500P

FOR USE WITH HINGE MCK

1 EA WIRE HARNESS QC-C-XXX SIZE AS REQUIRED FOR USE WITH DOOR

MCK

1 EA CARD READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR MIS 1 EA POWER SUPPLY BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR MIS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: 1. DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. 2. ENTRY BY VALID CREDENTIAL AT CARD READER WHICH SIGNALS ELECTRIC TRIM OF LOCK TO OPEN AND ALLOW ENTRY. 3. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES VIA THE INSIDE LEVER HANDLE. 4. INSIDE LEVER HANDLE HAS RX SWITCH WHICH WILL SIGNAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM OF A VALID RELEASE. 5. LOCK IS FAIL-SECURE UPON LOSS OF POWER DOOR WILL REMAIN LOCKED.




Hardware Group No. 02

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 9K-7-R-14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE PROVIDED BY OWNER 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA FC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE



GLAZING 088000-1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass for doors. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


GLAZING 088000-2



B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

B. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cardinal Glass Industries. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. JE Berkowitz, LP. 4. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 5. Pilkington North America.









GLAZING 088000-3

6. PPG Flat Glass; PPG Industries, Inc. 7. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

C. Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

D. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.




GLAZING 088000-4

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).








GLAZING 088000-5

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge


GLAZING 088000-6

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.



GLAZING 088000-7


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-#1: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass G1. Kind: FT (fully tempered). 2. Safety glazing required. 3. Thickness: 1/4 inch.



GLAZING 088000-8




NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.



1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.



C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa).

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) SCAFCO

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (18 GA).

c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Provide from same manufacturer as studs.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm).

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Provide from same manufacturer as studs. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). 3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.455 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

1. Provide from same manufacturer as studs.










2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm).

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.



1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.




3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring



channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.




E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.




GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.


1. Section 079219 “Acoustical Joint Sealants” for sound rated partitions. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.




A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.



2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. b. National Gypsum Company. c. United States Gypsum Company.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.








1. Material: Plastic. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.



D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.




3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring



member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 2: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas. 2. Level 4: All surfaces that will be exposed to view.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."




3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.




ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123-1

SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size if product is other than Basis of Design product.

C. Samples for Verification: Contractor shall retain on site as a record of selected materials. The Architect does not require samples for basis of design products to be submitted for review. For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Tiles: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type and

color. 3. Seismic Clips: Full size.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where

conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Diffusers. c. Grilles. d. Speakers. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. g. Perimeter moldings.

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles. 8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).

B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system, from ICC-ES.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed

component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from




moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company.







B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.

C. Classification: Provide tiles as follows:

1. Refer to Drawings for Basis of Design products.

D. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. United States Gypsum Company.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system and accessories of type, structural classification, and finish indicated that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Refer to Drawings for Basis of Design products.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.







C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces.

H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in-place during a seismic event.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.




E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges of tiles so tile-to-tile joints are interlocked.

1. Fit adjoining tiles to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tiles for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through ceiling.

2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tiles and moldings, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative.

B. Directly Attached Ceilings: Install bottom surface of tiles to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) and not exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) cumulatively.

C. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.




RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.




A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Flexco. 4. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 5. Nora Systems, Inc. 6. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).











D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Section 090000 “Finish Schedule” and/or Drawings.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.



3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.




3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.




RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 1

SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Unbacked rubber sheet flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient sheet flooring.

1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

2. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture and pattern specified in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of resilient sheet flooring indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of resilient sheet flooring, in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of resilient sheet flooring required.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.

F. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.



G. Product Schedule: For resilient sheet flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for resilient sheet flooring including resilient base and accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color and pattern in locations directed by Architect.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.





A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store rolls upright.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.

E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 UNBACKED RUBBER SHEET FLOORING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Johnsonite. Arcade. 2. Nora Systems, Inc. Noraplan (environcare, sentica, environcare). 3. American Biltrite. 4. Flexco..

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1859.







1. Type: Type I (homogeneous rubber sheet floor covering). 2. Thickness: As standard with manufacturer. 3. Hardness: Not less than required by ASTM F 1859

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.

E. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.

F. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Section 090000 “Finish Schedule” and/or Drawings.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:

1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.

a. Colors: Match flooring.

2. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams.

D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.

2. Cap Strip: Square metal cap provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.

3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.

E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet flooring.

3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.



B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6

inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Resilient sheet flooring to be installed contiguous under all laboratory casework and equipment.

F. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

H. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

I. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

J. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

K. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces. Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.

1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet flooring.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring installation:




1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply three coat(s).

E. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.




INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Matte Finish – Flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2 (High Side Sheen Flat “Velvet”): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Traditional Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.



2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 5. Samples must be dried for a minimum of seven days prior to submission to Architect.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.






B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As indicated in the finish schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 3.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.




3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.

2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 3.1C:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec Interior/Exterior Acrylic High-Build Masonry Primer

2) PPG Paints. Seal Grip Acrylic Universal Primer 17-921XI 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Eggshell 2) PPG Paints. Manor Hall Interior 100% Acrylic Satin Latex 82-400









3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Emerald Interior Acrylic Latex Satin

B. CMU Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 4.2D:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Kote 5000 Latex Production Block Filler Flat 2) Cloverdale Paint. Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 3) PPG Paints. Speedhide Hi Fill Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 6-15XI

b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec Interior/Exterior Acrylic High-Build Masonry Primer

2) PPG Paints. Seal Grip Acrylic Universal Primer 17-921XI 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer

c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Eggshell 2) PPG Paints. Manor Hall Interior 100% Acrylic Satin Latex 82-400 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Emerald Interior Acrylic Latex Satin

2. Alkyd System MPI INT 4.2N:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Kote 5000 Latex Production Block Filler Flat 2) Cloverdale Paint. Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 3) PPG Paints. Speedhide Hi Fill Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 6-15XI 4) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Heavy Duty Block Filler

b. Sealer Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Spec Premium Interior Latex Primer Primer 2) PPG Paints: Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Primer 6-4900XI 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProMar 200 Zero Interior Latex Primer

c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #51.

1) Samhwa Paint: MPI 51 Enamel AE


















C. Steel Substrates (hollow metal):

1. Latex over Shop-Applied Quick-Drying Shop Primer System MPI INT 5.1X:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for shop application, MPI #275.

1) Coordinate with hollow metal fabricator.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #43.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec 500 2) PPG Paints. Ultra-Hide 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint 1433 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProMar 400 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss

D. Wood Substrates (use at backing boards for telecom room):

1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System MPI INT 6.3U:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer

2) PPG Paints Seal Grip Alkyd Universal Primer 17-941NF 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProBlock Interior Oil-Based Primer

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish 2) PPG Paints. Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Flat 6-4110XI 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex

Flat

E. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 9.2B (Use at storage and telecom rooms, public corridors and lobbies):

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Spec Premium Interior Latex Primer Primer 2) PPG Paints: Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Primer 6-4900XI 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProMar 200 Zero Interior Latex Primer

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat.














c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Eggshell 2) PPG Paints. Manor Hall Interior 100% Acrylic Satin Latex 82-400 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Emerald Interior Acrylic Latex Satin

2. Alkyd over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2C (Use at laboratories):

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #45.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer

2) PPG Paints Seal Grip Alkyd Universal Primer 17-941NF 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProBlock Interior Oil-Based Primer

b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.

1) Benjamin Moore & Co. Super Spec Alkyd Semi Gloss Enamel 2) PPG Paints. Alkyd Semi-Gloss Paint 1507 3) Sherwin-Williams Company (The). ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss












VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-1

SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sliding visual display units.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.

B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints. 3. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.

1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Trim: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each trim profile. 3. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.

D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field measurements before fabrication.

1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.3 SLIDING VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

A. Horizontal-Sliding Visual Display Units: Factory-fabricated units consisting of extruded-aluminum tubular frame, fixed rear visual display panel, aluminum-framed horizontal-sliding visual display panels, and extruded-aluminum fascia that conceals overhead sliding track; designed for recessed mounting. Provide panels that operate smoothly without vibration or chatter.


a. AJW Architectural Products. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. c. Newline Products, Inc.

2. Three-Track Units: Fabricate unit with fixed rear panel covering entire rear surface. Provide three sliding panels, each equal to not less than one-third of overall length of unit.

3. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum overhead track and channel-shaped bottom guides; with two nylon ball-bearing carriers and two nylon rollers for each sliding panel.

4. Overall Width: 240 inches. 5. Overall Height: 44 inches.

B. Panels and Accessories:

1. Sliding Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on kraft-paper honeycomb core designed to be rigid and to resist warpage, not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick.







a. Color: White.

2. Accessories: Chalktray.

3. Aluminum Trim: Factory applied; in manufacturer's standard size and profile; with clear anodic finish.

2.4 MARKERBOARD PANELS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch (0.53 mm) uncoated base metal thickness. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's

standard moisture-barrier backing. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-coat process.

B. Hardboard: Forbidden.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1.

D. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

E. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.

F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

G. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.




C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.

C. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.

D. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Field-Assembled Visual Display Board Assemblies: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.



C. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.

D. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

E. Sliding Visual Display Units: Install units at mounting heights indicated. Attach to wall framing with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

1. Adjust panels to operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.




PROJECTION SCREENS 115213-1

SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated, front-projection screens. 2. Electrically operated, front-projection screens and controls.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front-projection screens.

2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for screen installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a magnesium carbonate surface as determined per SMPTE RP 94.



B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:

1. Drop lengths. 2. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 3. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units. 4. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes. 5. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units. 6. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units. 7. Accessories.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes of surface-mounted screen cases.




A. Maintenance Data: For front-projection screens to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front-projection screens until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of front-projection screens with adjacent construction, including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front-projection screens from single manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen manufacturer.

2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Provide units that are listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Controls: Remote, three-position control switch installed in recessed device box with flush cover plate matching other electrical device cover plates in room where switch is installed. a. Provide power supply for low-voltage systems if required. b. Provide key-operated, power-supply switch.

3. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in up and down positions,




and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. Mount motor inside roller with vibration isolators to reduce noise transmission.

4. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod with ends of rod protected by plastic caps.

5. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as braided polyester, on each side of screen that is connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull screen flat horizontally.

B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure, with Motor-in Roller, and with Tab Tensioning: Units designed and fabricated for suspended mounting; with bottom of case composed of two panels, fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring; one panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and fully raised, the other removable or openable for access to interior of case.


a. Da-Lite Screen Company. b. Draper Inc. Ultimate Access/Series V. Basis of Design. c. Stewart Filmscreen Corporation.

2. Electric motor operated, metal case, independently motorized closure, tab tensioned. Ceiling-recessed, metal headbox, sized as required for screen. UL approved "Suitable for use in environmental air space." Case finished white. Bottom of case consists of an independently motorized trap door that opens up inside the screen case. The trap door and the access door both hinge downward to allow access to inside of screen case. The doors remain attached to the screen case via a concealed full-length hinge. Releasing one latch at each end of screen case allows the doors to hinge downward and a prop arm at each end may be pivoted to engage with endcaps, keeping the door assembly in its fully open position. Symmetrical case allows for viewing surface to unroll from the back or front of the roller. The screen is attached to roller with roller brackets.

3. Quiet Motor mounted inside screen roller on rubber isolation insulators. Motor operates at 44db and is UL certified, rated 110-120V AC, 60 Hz, five wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated with pre-set accessible limit switches. Motor with overload protection and electric brake. Motor shall be left mounted..

4. Motor Screen Controls, UL certified.

a. Single station control rated 115V AC, 60 Hz with 3-position rocker switch with cover plate to stop or reverse screen at any point.

5. Projection Viewing Surface: Matt White XT1000V - On Axis gain of 1.0. 180 degree viewing cone. GREENGUARD Gold certified. Available with or without black backing.







6. Tab-Tensioning System: Viewing surface with integrated tabs and cable on each side of fabric to provide tension and ensure flat viewing surface. Viewing surface and tabs CNC cut as a single piece. Tabs RF welded to the back of viewing surface to prevent tab separation. Tab adhesives are not acceptable. Viewing surface inserted into aluminum bottom dowel.

2.3 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL

A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 0.8 at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.

B. Material: Vinyl-coated, glass-fiber fabric or vinyl sheet.

C. Mildew-Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested according to ASTM G 21.

D. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701.

E. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

F. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams.

G. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.

H. Size of Viewing Surface: 113 inch (2870 mm) diagonal, 60 inches x 96 inches (1524 mm x 2438 mm). 16:10 Format. Black masking borders standard.

I. Provide extra drop length of dimensions and at locations indicated.

1. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify rough-in openings are properly prepared.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.




C. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered.

1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Final Completion.




LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 115300 - 1

SECTION 115300 – LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

PART 1: DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide laboratory equipment and related work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

C. Section includes but is not limited to:

1. Cylinder Brackets

2. Peg Boards

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Relevant trades will provide rough openings, pits, substrate preparation and blocking for all equipment installation.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.

C. Owner may inspect equipment at manufacturers’ plant prior to shipment. Equipment found not in accord with specifications and approved drawings may be rejected. Replace rejected equipment at no cost to the owner. Provide Owners’ Representative two (2) week notice to all factory testing.

E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm having an established organization and factory, with production facilities specializing in type of equipment specified. Service response time to a telephone inquiry shall be same day (or within 4 hours, whichever is less) followed up by a factory trained technician at the site within 24 hours of the telephone inquiry; all serviceable components warehoused or readily available to service personnel; and fast access to shop drawings of all equipment in field.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Each piece of equipment listed includes the manufacturers’ name and catalogue number, establishing levels of quality, specific construction, features, operating conditions and desired features and accessories. By indicating other manufacturers’ names does not relieve perspective bidders of their obligation to prove that their submissions are equal to specified equipment in size, construction, performance, basic features, options and accessories prior to award.

G. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer, or approved in writing by manufacturer.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers’ Literature: Submit manufacturers’ literature edited to job requirements.

B. Spare Parts: Provide complete spare part kits to be kept by the University on site for emergency repairs. Include items which might break under normal usage and which would be required to keep the equipment operational.

C. Shop Drawings: In addition to work shown on manufacturers’ printed product data, submit dimensional roughing-in drawing, at a minimum scale of ½” = 1’-0”, showing equipment placed in actual project site conditions adjacent to other equipment and relationship to the work of other trades, as well as mechanical and electrical requirements. Rough0in drawings shall clearly indicate where equipment connection varies from relevant trade contractor supply source. Submit dimensioned fabrication drawings for custom fabricated equipment, including plans, elevations, and sections, at minimum scale of ¾” – 1’-0”, showing materials and gauges used.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating and maintenance instructions and parts listing for each item of fixed laboratory equipment. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, and any other data required by Owner. Comply with requirements of Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data”.

E. Manufacturers’ Qualifications: Letter confirming required minimum experience, references and service response time.

F. Applicable standards approval from NEMA, NEC, UL, ETL, or as specified with the individual equipment items.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment in this specification shall be Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed (CFCI). Certain equipment items will include Manufacturers’ Installation Supervision (MIS) or Manufacturers’ Equipment Demonstration (MED). MIS includes MED.

B. Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed (CFCI). General Contractor and/or relevant trade contractor (both identified as the “Contractor”) shall purchase, receive, unload, store, unpack, reassemble, set in place, install and clean up equipment. Deliver to site in manufactures’ original labeled containers. Provide any fasteners, supports or other miscellaneous items necessary for complete installation. All rough ins and final connections by contractor. Scheduling of on-site equipment demonstrations shall be at the convenience of the Owner.

C. Manufacturers’ Installation Supervision (MIS): Where noted in the specifications (i.e. MIS), the manufacturer shall provide adequate installation supervision personnel for as long as it takes to complete the installation to the satisfaction of the owners’ representative.

D. Manufacturers’ Equipment Demonstration (MED): Where noted in the specifications (i.e. MED), the manufacturer shall provide one (1) one-day trip to the job-site to instruct owner on proper installation and maintenance of the




equipment. Cost of this service shall be included in the equipment price. Scheduling of on site equipment demonstration shall be at the convenience of the owner.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Except where more stringent warranty requirements are noted in the individual equipment descriptions, all equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed for a minimum of one (1) year, parts and labor, from date of final completion against defective materials, design and workmanship. Defects shall be promptly rectified at vendors;’ expense after notification by Owner or Architect.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Drawings show arrangement and location of items of equipment. If it is necessary to vary from arrangement shown, because of structural, mechanical, electrical, or other considerations, make such variations only after approval of Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Verify all dimensions at building. Confirm that all equipment will be able to be moved through the building in order to reach its’ designated location. Measure all recesses and openings at buildings and provide all trim pieces, fillers and closures in sizes required.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CYLINDER BRACKET

A. The following manufacturer is approved for this project subject to their meeting the detailed requirements of the construction documents.

1. Dayton

2. Forma Scientific, Inc.

3. Lab Safety

B. Dayton 10U483 Cylinder Bracket or approved equal: Unit is cast aluminum, wall mounted, cylinder tank rack with adjustable nylon web belting with quick release buckle. Unit to be form fitted to laboratory equipment, up to 12” diameter laboratory gas cylinders. Unit is to be certified to meet OSHA and NFPA regulations and/or guidelines for flammable, compressed, or liquefied gases in portable cylinders.

C. Installation: Tank racks are to be securely fastened either to the adjacent wall, laboratory service pipe chase, or casework as shown on the drawings. Fasteners are to be capable of securing the tank rack in such a manner to withstand a horizontal load of 250 pounds.



PART 3 – EXECUTION

3. 1 INSPECTION

A. Check for shipping damage. Reject units with scratches, dents, or other defects that cannot be readily corrected.

B. Check job site to insure that rough-ins and substrates are correct and that equipment will fit as indicated on Equipment Drawings.

C. Do not proceed with installation until defects or oversights are corrected.

3. 2 INSTALLATION

A. Deliver equipment to job site freight paid.

B. Uncrate all equipment and place in locations shown on Equipment Drawings. Remove all crating materials and packing debris.

C. Install all items in accordance with Manufacturers’ standards. Provide all accessories necessary for a complete installation.

3. 3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Check operation and installation of equipment. Make adjustments as necessary to meet Manufacturers’ or these specifications (whichever is more stringent).

B. Replace items, which do not operate properly, have defacing marks or damage, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired as determined by the owners’ representation.

C. Clean and polish equipment in accordance with Manufacturers’ recommendations before and after demonstration for Owner. Leave ready for use with copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual attached to equipment in manner to be specified by Owners’ Representative.

D. Each manufacturer shall submit with his Contract Price proposal an itemized list of available accessories for Owners’ selection as part of this work. Provide unit prices for these accessory items; unit price cost shall be valid through entire construction prior and for an additional 90 days after substantial completion.




LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 1

SECTION 115313 - LABORATORY FUME HOODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods. 2. Piping and wiring within fume hoods for service fittings, light fixtures, fan switches, and

other electrical devices included with fume hoods. 3. Fume hood base cabinets. 4. Fume hood base stands. 5. Service support struts 6. Work tops within fume hoods. 7. Laboratory sinks and cup sinks in fume hoods. 8. Fume hood fittings, fixtures and accessories coordination.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring fume hoods.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring fume hoods.

3. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to fume hood base cabinets.

4. Section 115343 "Service Fittings and Accessories" for fume hood fittings, fixtures and accessories.

5. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for field quality-control testing of fume hoods.

6. Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" for VAV controls for fume hood exhaust.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of fume hoods.



B. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework and other laboratory equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with flooring installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory fume hoods.

1. Shop Drawings shall accurately interpret the Contract Documents and shall also show adjoining work in such detail as required to provide proper connections with said work. Where adjoining connecting work requires shop drawings, such shop drawings shall be submitted at the same time so that connections can be checked.

2. Verify all field measurements. Measurements available prior to submittal of shop drawings shall be shown and so noted on the shop drawings. Measurements not available prior to submission of shop drawings shall be noted on the shop drawings as not available and such measurements shall be obtained prior to fabrication.

3. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 4. Include details of all joints and connections. 5. Material types and gauges. 6. Glass types. 7. Sink details. 8. Hardware details. 9. Fittings and accessories. 10. Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction including

locations of blocking and other supports. Include calculations demonstrating that anchorages comply with seismic performance requirements, if so required.

11. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service supply connection required.

12. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels. 13. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections. 14. Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, laboratory casework,

and other laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from the above items. 15. Include layout of fume hoods in relation to lighting fixtures and air-conditioning registers

and grilles. 16. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.

C. Samples: For fume hood exterior finishes, interior lining, epoxy sinks and work tops.

D. Instructions:

1. Instructions shall be inscribed on instruction plate, attached to hood, as specified in Part 2 of this specification.

2. Written instructions in booklet form providing additional details on safe and proper operation and maintenance.

3. Provide a professional quality video on proper hood usage.




E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fume hoods indicated to comply with seismic performance requirements and design criteria, where so required by seismic zone/design.

F. Field Installation Mock Up: Provide one fume hood assembly with base cabinets for review and acceptance by the University. Coordinate installation with laboratory casework manufacturer and trim and fittings manufacturer. If hood is accepted it may be reused as part of the project. Mock up shall have all specified mechanical and electrical services connected, and be demonstrated as fully operational. Accepted mock-up shall be subject to testing specified in Part 3 of this section. Color as selected by Architect.


A. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements for as-manufactured containment and static pressure loss, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Certifications:

1. Certified test reports on all metal casework and fume hoods performed by an independent nationally recognized testing laboratory, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 110-2016 (latest edition).

2. Submit test reports on each size and type of hood verifying conformance to test performances specified. Test report must accompany each hood as part of installation and usage package. Submit independent test reports as required by specification.


A. Single source responsibility: Fume hood casework, work surfaces, and other laboratory equipment and accessories shall be manufactured or furnished by a single laboratory furniture company.

B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled workmen to produce high quality laboratory casework and equipment, and shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Five years or more experience in manufacture of laboratory casework and equipment of type specified.

2. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements. Provide contact at each.

C. Installer's qualifications: Factory certified by the manufacturer. Provide outline of certification program.




A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged fume hood finish.

B. Spare Parts: Provide complete spare part kits for each fume hood size, to be kept by the University on site for emergency repairs. Include all items which might break under normal usage and which would be required to keep the equipment operational.


A. Schedule delivery of equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete that equipment can be installed immediately following delivery.

B. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or another suitable material.

C. Protect all work surfaces throughout construction period with 1/4" corrugated cardboard completely covering the top and securely taped to edges. Mark cardboard in large lettering "No Standing".


A. Do not deliver or install equipment until the following conditions have been met:

1. Windows and doors are installed and the building is secure and weather tight. 2. Ceiling, overhead ductwork and lighting are installed. 3. All painting is completed and flooring located below casework is installed

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fume hoods until building is enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support fume hoods by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The fume hood manufacturer shall guarantee in writing the work and equipment under this section of the specifications, to be and remain free from defects of any kind as to materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of Final Completion, and shall leave the equipment in perfect working order at completion. The manufacturer shall stipulate in writing that they will repair and/or replace any and all defects in material and workmanship that may develop within that time, without expense to the Owner.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE EXHAUST VOLUME TYPE

A. Variable volume type with built-in automatic compensating bypass to maintain constant exhaust volume regardless of sash position.

1. Subject to requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include: a. Jamestown Metal Products b. Kewaunee Scientific. c. Labconco Corporation. Basic 70, Basis of Design d. NuAire, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory fume hoods from single manufacturer.

C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, types, and configurations of fume hoods by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' fume hoods of similar sizes, types, and configurations, and complying with the Specifications, may be considered. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

D. Bypass: Positive in action and controlled by the sash operation.

E. Low Impedance, panel shall be provided in the lintel bypass area and one inch bypass shall be provided immediately above the work surface and directly below the bottom horizontal sash rail. Designs which require all bypass to enter hood over front solid panel are not acceptable.

F. As sash is lowered, bypass design shall limit the increase in face velocity to maximum of four times the average face velocity with the sash full open.

G. Negative variations of face velocity shall not exceed 20% of the average face velocity at any designated measuring point as defined in this section.

H. The by-pass designed bench mounted laboratory hood shall be designed to minimize face velocity fluctuations as the sash is raised or lowered. With the sash positioned six inches above the foil, the inflow velocity shall not be less than twice the selected full open face velocity nor greater than three times that amount.

I. Face velocities shall be set at full height of the sash. Face velocities shall vary no more than 20% from this setting regardless of the sash opening height. Fume hood shall maintain constant exhaust volume at any baffle position for safety. Maximum variation in exhaust CFM, static pressure and average face velocity as a result of baffle adjustment shall not exceed 5% for any baffle position at the specified rate velocity.

J. Noise Criteria: test data of octave band analysis verifying hood is capable of a 50NC value when connected to a 50NC HVAC source. Reading shall be taken 3 feet in front of open sash at 80 fpm face velocity.



K. Variable Air Volume Conversion: Hoods shall be prepared for VAV controls. A face velocity alarm to monitor hood performance shall be provided by the hood manufacturer.


A. Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/2-inch wg (124 Pa) at 100-fpm (0.51-m/s) face velocity with sash fully open when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct and at least three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.

2.3 FUME HOODS

A. General Requirements:

1. Fume hoods shall function as ventilated, enclosed workspaces, designed to capture, confine and exhaust fumes, vapors and particulate matter produced or generated within the enclosure.

2. Design fume hoods for consistent and safe air flow through the hood face. Negative variations of face velocity shall not exceed 20% of the average face velocity at any designated measuring point as defined in this section.

3. Average illumination of work area with Polyresin liner: Minimum 80 foot-candles. Work area shall be defined as the area inside the superstructure from side to side and from face of baffle to the inside face of the sash, and from the working surface to a height of 28 inches.

4. Fume hood shall maintain essentially constant exhaust volume at any sash position for safety. Maximum variation in exhaust CFM, static pressure and average face velocity as a result of sash adjustment shall not exceed 5% for any sash position at the specified exhaust volume.

5. Noise Criteria: Test data of octave band analysis verifying hood is capable of a 50 NC value when connected to a 50 NC HVAC source. Reading shall be taken 3' in front of an open sash, 5’ off the floor at 100 fpm face velocity.

6. Fume hood shall be designed to minimize static pressure loss with adequate slot area and bell shaped exhaust collar configuration. Maximum average static pressure loss readings taken three diameters above the hood outlet from four points, 90 degrees apart, shall not exceed the following maximums with sash in full open position:

Face Velocity Measured S.P.L. (W.G.) 60 F.P.M. .15 inches 100 F.P.M. .30 inches

B. Product Standards: Comply with SEFA 1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended Practices." Provide fume hoods UL listed and labeled for compliance with UL 1805.

C. Bypass Fume Hoods: Provide bypass fume hoods. Compensating bypass above the sash opens as sash is closed. Provide sufficient bypass capacity so that face velocity with sash opening of 6 inches (150 mm) does not exceed 3 times the face velocity with sash fully open.




D. Restricted-Bypass Fume Hoods: Provide restricted-bypass fume hoods. Partial compensating bypass above the sash opens after sash is closed to less than [20] [40] percent open. Design partial bypass to maintain exhaust capacity of at least 25 cfm per sq. ft. (127 L/s per sq. m) of work surface regardless of sash position.

E. VAV Control: Equip fume hoods with an electronic control unit with a sensing device that monitors face velocity, and a motorized damper on the exhaust connection that maintains a constant face velocity by controlling air volume in response to control unit. Equip units with manual override switch that opens motorized damper to provide maximum exhaust capacity regardless of sash position.

1. Provide output transmitter on electronic control unit that produces zero- to 10-V dc signal proportional to fume hood exhaust volume for interface with building's HVAC control system.

2. Provide electronic control unit that also monitors sash position and anticipates changes in face velocity caused by abrupt changes in sash position.

F. Auxiliary Air: Equip fume hoods with auxiliary-air outlet for connection to a system that supplies air from an external source equal to 70 percent of the exhausted air volume. Auxiliary-air system introduces air directly above and immediately in front of hood face. Capture efficiency of hoods shall be 90 percent minimum.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester: Polyester laminate with a chemical-resistant gel coat on exposed faces, and having a flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 84.

D. Polypropylene: Unreinforced polypropylene complying with ASTM D 4101, Group 01, Class 1, Grade 2.

E. Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

2. Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



1. Three wire grounding type ground fault interrupter receptacles rated at 120 V.A.C. at 20 amperes. Provide 250 V.A.C. receptacles where specified. Flush plates: Black acid resistant thermoplastic. Factory prewired receptacles and switches to a single junction box.

2. Provide a dedicated receptacle on top of the hood for safety monitor and alarms. 3. Hood shall be wired for three circuits.

G. Hood service fixture feed lines shall be 66” long, an adequate length to connect to building services either overhead or behind the cabinet.

1. Water, 1/4” copper tubing. 2. Other laboratory gases, provide stainless steel lines. 3. Burning gas, provide black iron lines. 4. Provide face mounted vacuum breaker for water service.

H. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel fasteners where exposed to fumes.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoods only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods shall be capable of being partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement through a 35-by-79-inch (889-by-2007-mm) door opening.

B. Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) thick, with component parts screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior surfaces of component parts before assembly.

C. Superstructure: Rigid, self-supporting assembly of double wall construction, maximum 4-7/8" thick. Wall consists of a sheet steel outer shell with urethane powder finish and a corrosion resistant inner liner, this wall houses and conceals steel framing members, attaching brackets and remote operating service fixture mechanisms and services. Panels must be attached to a full frame construction, minimum 14 gauge galvanized members. Panels and brackets attached to eliminate screw heads and metallic bracket from hood interior.

1. Access to fixture valves concealed in wall provided by exterior removable access panels, gasket access panels on the inside liner walls, or through removable front posts.

D. Stainless Steel Exterior: Fabricate from stainless steel sheet, 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick, with component parts screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings.

E. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls at front of fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, and remote-control valves.




F. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even flow of air into fume hood.

G. Interior Lining: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester, not less than 3/16 inch (4.75 mm) thick. Smooth finish and white color in final appearance. Flexural strength: 14,000 psi. Flame spread: 17 or less per U.L. 723 and ASTM E84-80. Baffle must be same material as liner. Metallic baffles, brackets or supports on hood interior – not acceptable. Liner and baffle material must meet 1.03-performance test. Independent test validation is mandatory

H. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Lining: Molded unit consisting of end panels, back panel, preset rear baffle, and top bonded together into a single piece; reinforced to form a rigid assembly to which exterior is attached.

1. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.

I. Rear Baffle: Baffles providing controlled air vectors into and through the fume hood must be fabricated of the same material as the liner. Provide minimal exhaust slots full height on vertical sides of the baffle. High performance 2-piece baffle will be used. Baffle shall incorporate exhaust slots located to purge the upper and lower area of the hood. Baffle to be non-adjustable. Baffles with manual or automatic adjustment are not acceptable. All baffles, supports, and brackets to be non-metallic.

J. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide uniform airflow from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection.

1. Duct-Stub Material: [Stainless steel] [Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester]. 2. Duct Stub Shape: [Rectangular] [Circular 12.81 ID] [Oval] with ends radiused, shaped

and flanged.

K. Downdraft bypass: Low resistant type, 18 gauge steel chamber, directional louvers – not acceptable. All bypass air shall enter top of bypass chamber and enter hood in a down flow direction. Chamber shall protect user from expelled particulate in the event of an adverse internal reaction.

L. Sashes: Provide operable sashes of type indicated.

1. Fabricate from 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) thick steel sheet, with chemical-resistant finish. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners welded and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set glazing in chemical-resistant, U-shaped gaskets.

2. Vertical Rising Sash: The hoods shall have a full view type with clear, unobstructed, side-to-side view of fume hood interior and service fixture connections. Sash to have a 35-inch sight line and a 28.5” vertical access height.

3. Bottom sash rail: 2" maximum, 18-gauge steel with powder coating finish. Provide integral formed, flush pull the full width of bottom rail. Full width extruded dual durometer bottom bumper and airflow control strip. Set safety glass into rails in deep



form, extruded poly-vinyl chloride glazing channels available on constant volume and restricted bypass hoods

4. Glaze with laminated safety glass. 5. Sash guides: Extruded PVC. 6. Sash pull: Corrosion resistant steel with chemical resistant powder coating. Maximum

1.5” thick. 7. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless steel cable system to

hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing sheaves, plastic glides in stainless steel guides, and stainless steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of each sash unit. Maximum 7 pounds pull required to raise or lower sash throughout its full 18” height of operating sash opening. Life cycle test sash and weight. Provide independent test data.

M. Airfoil: The airfoil will be low profile, relatively flush to the work surface with ample room for electrical hospital grade cords to fit beneath the airfoil. This sill to be used on both Sash Types. Sill to be ergonomically radiused on front edge. Sill must pivot forward to provide cord and trough access. Airfoil sills that are not low profile are not acceptable.

N. Auto-Sash: Sash shall be designed to promote usage as an upper body and face shield. Face velocities and volumes shall be based on an 18” operating opening. Sash shall have the capability to be raised to full 28.5” vertical opening for loading or unloading of large apparatus. A lock-open shall be provided. Sash shall lower automatically to the operating position or lower when released from any position above 18”. Auto-sash function shall be life cycle tested and not incorporate the need for motor drives. Submit third party validation of life cycle tests.

O. Light Fixtures: Provide vapor-proof, two-tube, rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures, of longest practicable length; complete with tubes at each fume hood. Shield tubes from hood interior with 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) thick laminated glass or 3-mm-thick tempered glass, sealed into hood with chemical-resistant rubber gaskets. Provide units with fluorescent tubes easily replaceable from outside of fume hood.

1. Interior of fixture: White, high reflecting plastic enamel. 2. Size of fixture: Largest possible up to 48" for hoods with superstructures up to seven

feet. Provide two 36" fixtures for hoods with eight-foot superstructures. 3. Include lamps with fixtures. Hoods without lamps are not acceptable. 4. Illumination: Per performance values, Part 1 of this Section.

P. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between fume hoods or fume hood base cabinets and adjacent building construction. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as fume hoods or fume hood base cabinets, as applicable.

Q. Ceiling Extensions: Provide filler panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above fume hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of fume hoods to ceiling.

R. Finished Back Panels: Where rear surfaces of fume hoods are exposed to view, provide finished back panels matching rest of fume hood enclosure.

S. Gaskets: White 70 durometer PVC for interior access panels. Gasket interior access panels to eliminate air leakage and to retain liquids inside hood.




T. Work surface: Hood work surface and hood floor surface shall be of solid 1-1/4” thick epoxy resin (black) and have a 3/8” minimum deep dished surface with a marine edge conforming to the hood interior. Epoxy hood work surface shall have cutout relief holes for passage of service fixture lines. Vent holes, if required, shall be located in the rear edge of the work surface above the top of the marine edge for the connection to provide for the venting of the acid storage cabinet.

1. Epoxy work surfaces shall have one or more cutouts for the epoxy cup sink as indicated on the drawings.

U. Comply with requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop Drawings. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 FUME HOOD WORK TOPS SINKS AND SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Provide metal base cabinets in finish matching fume hood exterior finish.

B. Work Tops: 1-1/4” thick epoxy resin (black).

1. Work-Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge with beveled edge and corners. 2. Where acid storage cabinets are indicated beneath fume hoods, provide holes in work

tops as need to accommodate cabinet vents. 3. Where epoxy sinks occur in epoxy work tops, provide integral sinks bonded to tops with

invisible joint line. 4. Where stainless steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless steel tops, factory weld into one

integral unit. 5. For perchloric acid fume hoods, provide stainless steel work tops with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

raised front edge and integral drain trough at back of top with top sloped to trough.

C. Service fixtures and fittings: Refer to Section 115343 for information on all fittings, trim and accessories. Hood manufacturer shall provide all internal piping and wiring to allow for installation and operation of the hood and valves.

D. Cup Sinks: Material and size as indicated.

1. Provide with stainless steel strainers and integral tailpieces. 2. Epoxy Resin Sinks: Integrally molded from modified thermosetting epoxy resin,

specially compounded and oven cured. Color to match laboratory tops. 3. Provide 1/2” radius cove at vertical and horizontal corners. Pitch bottom to drain outlet. 4. Drain: 1 1/2” drain connection, threaded polypropylene removable drain outlet, location

centered. 5. Stainless Steel Mesh Insert: Type 316 stainless steel, 8x8 mesh per square inch covering

full surface of rectangular cup sink. 6. Cover: Provide an epoxy resin insert cover so that rectangular cup sink can be closed,

flush with the fume hood working surface. 7. Sink types and nominal inside dimension sizes:



Tag Sink Type Inside Dimension SH1 Cup Sink, Oval: 6 1/4”L x 3 3/4”W x 3 1/2”D

E. Fume Hood Base Stands: Welded steel tubing legs, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) square with channel stretchers and aprons. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.

1. Structural Performance[ except for Fume Hood Base Stands for Radioisotope Hoods]: Capable of withstanding 50-lb/ft. (74-kg/m) work top, 75 lb/ft. (112 kg/m) on work top, plus weight of hood, without permanent deformation or excessive deflection.

2. Structural Performance of Fume Hood Base Stands for Radioisotope Hoods: Capable of withstanding 50-lb/ft. (74-kg/m) work top, 200 lb/ft. (297 kg/m) on work top, plus weight of hood, without permanent deformation or excessive deflection.

3. Knee Space: Provide clear floor space not less than 30 inches (760 mm) wide by 25 inches (635 mm) deep by 27 inches (685 mm) high within fume hood base stands unless otherwise indicated.

4. Leg Shoes: Black vinyl or rubber, open-bottom, slip-on type.

2.7 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT FINISH

A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.

B. Preparation: Spray clean metal with a heated cleaner/phosphate solution, pre-treat with iron phosphate spray, water rinse, and neutral final seal. Immediately dry in heated ovens, gradually cooled, prior to application of finish.

C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply urethane powder coat of selected color and bake in controlled high temperature oven to assure a smooth, hard satin finish. Surfaces shall have a chemical resistant, high grade laboratory furniture quality finish of the following thickness: Liquid, dipped, solvent based finishes are not and will not be acceptable.

1. Exterior and interior exposed surfaces: 1.5 mil average and 1.2 mil minimum. 2. Backs of cabinets and other surfaces not exposed to view: 1.2 mil average. 3. Colors for Fume Hood Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Cabinet Surface Finish Tests: All casework construction and performance characteristics shall be in full compliance with SEFA 8 standards. At the owner’s request, independent, third party performance testing must be submitted validating compliance and adheres to the finish specifications.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Safety Monitor/Alarm System: Provide Safety Monitor/Alarm System, which monitors face velocity and provides audible and visual alarm if face velocity drops below safe levels. As the




internal fume hood pressure changes as the sash opening is closed and opened, the flow passing over the thermistor is calibrated to a face velocity, which is displayed on the front of the monitor.

1. Safety monitor: UL listed, tamper proof, with all alarm circuits, electric components, external tubing, and manifolds furnished complete and factory installed. Mounted directly on hood and shall provide digital readout. Unit shall be flush with the hood face.

2. Calibration shall be required once the hood is stationed and the hood exhausts and room supply systems are balanced. A secondary calibration has been factory set into the alarm's memory only to determine that the alarm is functional and ready for shipment. The primary calibration must be completed in the field.

3. Airflow sensor: Thermally compensated glass-beaded thermistor, factory connected to a sidewall port on the interior of the fume hood.

4. Alarm Signal: Audible and visual signal.

a. Silence pushbutton, which disables the audible alarm, shall be accessible on the front of the safety monitor.

b. Provide alternate mode in which audible alarm is silenced indefinitely but visual alarm remains activated until the alarm condition is corrected.

c. When alarm condition is corrected and face velocity and volume return to specified levels, the Safety Monitor will automatically reset and begin routine monitoring.

5. Provide test circuit to verify proper Safety Monitor operation. 6. Electrical Rating: Maximum 12 VDC and maximum current rating of 200MA.

B. Sash Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when sash is opened beyond preset position.

1. Provide with silence and test switches.

C. Sash Stops: Provide fume hoods with sash stops to limit hood opening to designated work height. Sash stops can be manually released to open sash fully for cleaning fume hood and for placing large apparatus within fume hood.

2.9 BASE CABINETS

A. Manufacturer shall be ICI CampbellRhea (Kewaunee alternate at the Kewaunee hood) as part of the fume hood assembly.

B. Materials: Cabinet shall be constructed of 18 gauge or heavier cold rolled sheet steel. Metal finish shall match fume hood.

C. Assembly Components:

1. Acid storage cabinets. 2. Flammable (Solvent) storage cabinets. 3. Standard base storage cabinets. 4. Work surface shall be part of the fume hood assembly or casework assembly.



5. Provide filler panels and spacer kits as required for cabinets to match width of fume hoods.

6. Install 1/8” phenolic resin along exposed cabinet sides and front, butt to underside of toes kick and scribe to floor before installing floor base. Refer to details on drawings.

D. Base Cabinet Schedule: Cabinet types and locations are noted on the drawings.

1. Acid Storage Cabinet: Where noted on the drawings, provide a polyethylene lined acid storage cabinet in size noted to fit under and support the fume hood.

a. Construction shall be dual wall 20 gauge steel construction with 1/4” thick white polypropylene lining on interior surfaces. All joints welded.

b. Doors shall have locks. c. Rear vent outlets for connection to vent kits. d. Provide two polyethylene tray inserts to contain spills. Provide one adjustable

dished steel shelf. All interior surfaces shall be polyethylene. e. Provide leveling legs and front cover plate. f. Provide filler panels for flush fit to wall. g. Urethane powder coated steel in color selected by Architect. h. Permanently affix lettering in a contrasting colour in letters which are 1 1/2” high

which state “ACID STORAGE”. Text shall align with all cabinets having lettering. Submit colors for review.

i. Provide removable backs for access to utilities.

2. Flammable (Solvent) Storage Cabinet: Where noted on the drawings, provide a solvent storage cabinet in size noted to fit under and support the fume hood.

a. Cabinet shall meet all UL, OSHA and NFPA standards for flammable and combustible liquids storage cabinets.

b. Construction shall be fully enclosed and designed to support the fume hood. Provide dual wall 18 gauge steel with 1 1/2” air gap. All joints shall be welded.

c. Provide spring loaded, self-closing, self-latching doors which close automatically when temperature reaches 165°F (75°C), utilizing fusible link. Doors shall have locks. Set door bottom 2 (two) inches above bottom of cabinet to create 2 inches deep containment well.

d. Provide dual wire, 18 gauge steel with 1 1/2” air gap. e. Provide dished shelf with a front lip. f. Provide adjustable dished steel shelf. g. Provide leveling legs and front cover plate. h. Provide rear vent outlets for connection of vent kits. i. Provide filler panels for flush fit to wall. j. Urethane powder coated steel in colour selected by Architect. k. Permanently affix lettering in a contrasting colour in letters which are 1 1/2” high

which state “FLAMMABLE STORAGE KEEP FIRE AWAY”. Text shall align with all cabinets having lettering. Submit colors for review.

3. Standard Storage Base Cabinet: Where noted on the drawings, provide a storage cabinet in size noted to fit under and support the fume hood.




a. Construction shall be dual wall 20 gauge steel construction. All joints shall be welded.

b. Shelf shall be reinforced for additional load. c. Provide leveling legs and front cover plate. d. Urethane powder coated steel in color selected by Architect. e. Provide filler panels for flush fit to wall.

2.10 SERVICE SUPPORT STRUTS

A. Provide open slot metal bracing systems for this project.

B. For the purposes of this project, the product identification numbers of Unistrut have been used. If another manufacturer is submitted on this project, provide a comparison chart showing the product numbers of both manufacturers.

C. Service support struts: Heavy 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” steel channel uprights, Unistrut P-1000 series or approved equal.

1. Fasten at top and bottom with U-shaped epoxy coated spreader and bolts, designed to support tops, box curbs, troughs, hoods, or other heavy loads. Attach spreaders with Unistrut clips and 1/2” hex head nuts.

2. Service piping and drain line hanger supports shall be provided by the General Contractor.

3. Service support struts shall be installed prior to the casework for the use of other trades. 4. The work surface and service fittings for the chase shall be mounted independently of the

remainder of countertops and cabinets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.


C. Provide drawings and other information for other trades and subcontractors whose work is affected by the fume hoods.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fume hoods according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building and adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels but provide for easy removal and



secure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

1. Install plumb, square, and straighten with no distortion and securely anchor as required. 2. Secure work surfaces to casework and fume hood with material and procedures

recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Seismic restraints art to be designed in accordance with applicable state and local seismic

codes.

B. Do not deliver or install equipment until the following conditions are met for each of the rooms:

1. Walls and ceiling shall have a prime coat and at least one finish coat of paint.

a. Final paint and finish coat should be applied when the fume hoods have been completely installed. Care should be taken by the painter to avoid damaging the laboratory furniture and fume hoods.

2. Flooring: Flooring should be installed prior to the installation of cabinets and hoods. 3. Plumbing work should be located in the service pipe chase areas behind the cabinets.

Piping shall be inspected and replaced as required. 4. Horizontal piping and drain lines should be installed and connected. 5. Service fixtures should be connected (except sinks) and tested. 6. Services to fume hood brought top one point of entry. 7. Permanent lighting fixtures and tubes should be installed and connected. 8. Electrical supply should be in the service strip (pipe chase) area behind the cabinets. 9. Horizontal conduits should be installed and wire pulled. 10. Electrical service fixtures (outlets and switches) should be connected and tested. 11. Provide power to junction box. 12. Duct Work: Refer to mechanical drawings [and specifications].

C. General: Set in place all items covered by this section in a sequence so not to delay construction or work of other trades and subcontractors.

1. Set pipe chase construction for use by other trades. Install pipe chase, work surfaces and fittings where required by pother trades.

2. Base cabinets should be located in their designated positions in the laboratory leveled by means of micro-adjustment device located in the corner of the cabinet.

3. Work surfaces shall be fabricated in largest piece possible. Tops shall be securely anchored to base cabinets and the pipe chase from under the counter.

4. Install miscellaneous fillers and scribes where shown on drawings or required for a flush complete installation.

5. Install fume hood assembly and base with required faucets and fittings.

D. Accessory Installation: Install accessories and fittings in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.




3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without interference.

B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. At completion of installation, check operation with all fume hoods. Supply certification and test reports for each hood as to air flow and volume per the Testing Criteria section.

D. Verify operation of all laboratory fittings and fixtures.

E. Correct all non-conforming items.


A. Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 to verify compliance with performance requirements.

1. Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, and building's HVAC system, or replace hoods and make other corrections until tested hoods perform as specified.

2. After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified.

3.5 TESTING CRITERIA

A. The manufacturer shall supply certification that the fume hoods meet the following criteria.

B. Source Quality Control Testing of Fume Hoods:

1. Evaluation of manufacturers’ standard product shall take place in manufacturers’ own test facility, with testing personnel, samples, apparatus, instruments, and test materials supplied by the manufacturer at no cost to the University. Each hood shall be individually tested.

2. Submit test report consisting of the following test parameters and equipment for each hood width and configuration specified.

3. Hood shall achieve a rating of 4.0 AM 0.05 P.P.M. or better when tested to ASHRAE-110.

4. Manufacturers’ Test Facility shall be of sufficient size to provide unobstructed clearance of five feet each side and ten feet in front of fume hood. Provide make up air to replace room air exhausted through fume hood and to obtain a negative 0.2” w.g. room pressure. Introduce make up air in a manner that minimizes drafts in front of hood to less than 20% of the face velocity. Connect 80 feet per minute air velocity through the face of fume hood. Adjustment in blower shall vary face velocity down to 60 feet per minute. Examine facility to verify conformance to the requirements of this section.

5. Testing Equipment:



a. Properly calibrated hot wire thermal anemometer probes by Sierra Model 600-02 or approved equal; correlate with computer data acquisition format to provide simultaneous readings at all points.

b. Pilot tube and inclined manometer with graduations no greater than 0.2 inches of water, F.W. Dwyer Model 400 or approved equal. Calibration curves based on 20 Pitot traverse readings and correlated to a digital readout indicator to provide quick and accurate adjustment of air flow.

c. Tracer Gas: Sulfur hexa-fluoride supplied from a cylinder at a test flow rate of four liters per minute.

d. Ejector System: Tracer gas ejector shall be IHE No. 525-014 or approved equal. Submit sufficient proof of ejector system calibration.

e. Critical Orifice: Sized to provide tracer gad at four liters per minute at an upstream pressure of 30 PSIG.

f. Detection Instruments: Ion Track Model 61 Leak Meter II sulfur hexa fluoride detector instrument.

g. Recorder with an accuracy better than plus or minus 0.5% of full scale. h. Three dimensional manikin, overall height 67”, clothed in a smock. i. Titanium tetrachloride glass modules. CAUTION: Titanium tetrachloride is

corrosive and irritating; skin contact or inhalation shall be avoided. j. One dozen 30-second smoke bombs.

6. Preliminary Test and Data:

a. Provide sketch of room indicating room layout, location of significant equipment, including test hood and other hoods. Provide sketch of air supply system indicating type of supply fixtures.

b. Reverse Air Flows and Dead Space:

1) Swab strip of titanium tetrachloride along both walls and floor of hood in a line 6” behind and parallel to the hood face, and along the top of the face opening. Swab an 8” diameter circle on the back of the hood. All smoke should be carried to the back of the hood and exhausted.

2) Test the operation of the bottom air bypass air foil by running the cotton swab under the air foil.

3) If visible fumes flow out of the front of the hood, the hood fails the test and receives no rating.

c. Face Velocity Measurements: Face velocity shall be determined by averaging minimum of four and maximum of eight readings at the hood face. Take readings at center of a grid made up of sections of equal area across the top half of the face and sections of equal area across the bottom half of the face. Take simultaneous readings at each point with a series of calibrated hot wire anemometers over a one minute period of time. Probes shall be correlated to a computer data acquisition package, which shall provide an average of each reading over that one minute period and also an overall average. During the one minute monitoring period, all velocities must be automatically update average at a maximum of four second intervals.

7. Test Procedure:




a. Check sash operation by moving sash through its’ full travel. Verify that sash operation is smooth and easy, and that vertical rising shash shall hold at any height without creeping up or down. Position sash in the full open position.

b. Measure exhaust air flow with the baffles position to give maximum air flow. Measure exhaust air volume with baffles position to give minimum air flow. Verify that the air volume at minimum air flow is not less than 95% of the exhaust air volume at maximum air flow. Hoods exceeding this fail the test and receive no rating.

c. Take a static pressure reading, using methods assuring an accurate reading, in an area of the ductwork no more than three feet nor less than one foot above the exhaust collar. Static pressure loss shall not exceed values given under Design Requirements in Part 1 of this Section.

d. Install ejector in test positions. For a typical bench type hood, three positions are required: left, center and right as seen looking into the hood. In the left position the ejector centerline is 12” from the left inside wall of the hood; center position is equal distance from the inside sidewalls; and the right position is 12” from the right inside wall. The ejector body is 6” in from the hood face in all positions. Location of ejector may require modification for hoods of unusual dimensions.

e. Install manikin positioned in front of the hood, centered on the ejector. f. Open tracer gas block valve. Correlate readings with a computer data acquisition

package, which is capable of monitoring and visually recording a minimum of one reading per second for a minimal three minute time periods at each of the three positions.

g. The control rating of the hood shall be the maximum of the three average values for the three test positions.

h. The control level rating of the hood as XXAMyyy, where XX equals the release rate in liters per minute (4.0) and AM represents the as manufactured test sequence and yyy equals the control level in parts per million.

i. All data on the above test conditions including instrumentation and equipment, test conditions, preliminary test and data information shall be provided on a one page report, including a printout of the average face velocities, and a sequence graph type performance curve on all three tracer gas positions.

8. Constant Volume/Bypass and VAV/Conventional Fume Hoods:

a. Conduct test as outlined above with the sash open. b. Ignite a smoke bomb within the fume hood work area to verify that the fumes are

quickly carried away. Move the lighted bomb about the fume hood work area, checking near fume hood ends and work surface to verify that there is no reverse flow of air at these locations.

C. Field Quality Control Testing of Fume Hoods:

1. Field testing shall be performed with the Owners representative and Architect present. 2. Field Testing Requirements for all Fume Hoods:

a. Perform tests in the field to verify proper operation of the fume hoods before they are put into use, using only qualified personnel.



b. Perform tests after installation is complete, the building ventilation system has been balanced, all connections have been made, and written verification has been submitted that the above conditions have been met.

c. Verify that the building make up air system is in operation, the doors and windows are in normal operating position, and that all other hoods and exhaust devices are operating at designed conditions.

d. Correct all unsafe conditions disclosed by these tests before request of test procedures.

e. Submit testing agency which is certified to perform ASHRAE 100 (As Installed) Testing to Architect for Approval.

f. Perform ASHRAE 110 (As Installed) testing on all fume hood equipment and submit all field results to Architect for review.

g. All fume hoods shall pass the ASHRAE 110 (As Installed) test before acceptance of equipment.

3. Testing Equipment:

a. Properly calibrated hot wire thermal anemometer, Alnor Model No. 8500D-1 Compuflow or approved equal.

b. Supply of 30 second smoke bombs. c. Supply of titanium tetrachloride.

4. Test Procedure – SEFA LF-1:

a. Check room conditions in front of fume hood using a thermal anemometer and a smoke source to verify that the velocity of cross drafts does not exceed 20% of the specified average fume hood velocity. Eliminate any cross drafts that exceed these values before proceeding.

1) Caution: Titanium tetrachloride fumes are toxic and corrosive. Use sparingly; avoid inhalation and exposure to body, clothing and equipment that might be affected by corrosive fumes.

2) Note: No fume hood can operate properly if excessive cross drafts are present.

b. Perform the following test to verify conformance of actual fume hood face velocities to those specified. Turn on the exhaust blower with the sash in full open position. Determine the face velocity by averaging the velocity of six readings taken at the fume hood face: at the centers of a grid made up of three sections of equal area across the top half of the fume hood face and three sections of equal area across the bottom half of the hood face. If not in accordance with specifications, refer to manufacturers’ Troubleshooting Guide for aid in determining cause of variation in the air flow.

c. Check sash operation by moving sash through its’ full travel. Verify that sash operation is smooth and easy, and that vertical rising sash shall hold down at any height without creeping up or down.

5. Field Testing of Air Flow in Fume Hoods:




a. Turn fume hood exhaust blower on. With sash in the open position check air flow into the fume hood using a cotton swab dipped in titanium tetrachloride or other smoke source. Verify that air flow is into the fume hood over the entire face area by a complete traverse of the fume hood 6” inside the face. Reverse flow is evidence of unsafe conditions. Take necessary corrective actions and retest.

b. Move a lighted smoke bomb throughout the fume hood work area directing the smoke across the work surface and against the side walls and baffle. Verify that smoke is contained within the fume hood and rabidly exhausted.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide all necessary protective measures to prevent exposure of equipment from exposure to other construction activity.

B. Manufacturer shall advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of material and installed fume hoods from damage by work of other trades.

3.7 TRAINING

A. The manufacturer and installer shall provide a minimum of two days training session at the site to instruct the University personnel in the proper use and service of all items installed in this section. Submit written instruction booklet providing details on the safe and proper operation and maintenance, prior to the scheduling of the training session.

B. Review the operation and maintenance of all hood types and features.

C. The session shall be held prior to the date of Final Completion and include representatives as selected by the University. Make a list of those who attend and receive written approval of the content and completeness of the training.

D. Obtain written certificate of attendance and understanding by the University.

3.8 FUME HOOD SCHEDULE

A. Bench-Top Fume Hood Type FH-6:

1. 6’ Fume Hood 2. Epoxy work surface with cup sink cutout 3. Sash Stop 4. Hood prepared for VAV controls 5. Air flow monitor (required for local alarm) 6. Cup sink (2), SH-1 7. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) swivel p-drum trap (2) 8. Duplex GFI Receptacle (2) 9. Acid cabinet 10. Flammable cabinet



11. Standard storage cabinet 12. See drawings and section 115343 for the required service fittings for each fume hood and

base cabinet.




SERVICE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 115343 - 1

SECTION 115343 –SERVICE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Faucets, fittings and trim.

2. Service fittings and trim (including fume hoods) located on or in casework or on walls in laboratories.

3. Electrical pedestals on top of countertops.

4. Drench hose on top of countertops.


1. Section 115313 “Laboratory Fume Hoods”

2. Section 115300 “Laboratory Equipment”

6. Plumbing/Mechanical: Division 21/23

7. Electrical: Division 26.


A. Codes: Comply with the State of New Jersey Codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards:

1. National Sanitary Foundation (NSF) Standards.

2. American Society of Testing and Materials: ASTM A-167 (latest edition).

C. Single source responsibility: Laboratory trim and fittings, and accessories, shall be manufactured or furnished by a single laboratory furniture company.

D. Manufacturers’ qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled workmen to produce high quality laboratory trim and fittings, and shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Ten years or more experience in manufacture of laboratory casework and equipment of type specified.

2. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1.

1. Shop drawings accurately interpret the Contract Documents and shall also show adjoining work in such detail as required to provide proper connections with said adjoining work. Where adjoining connected work requires Shop Drawings, such Shop Drawings shall be submitted at the same time so that connection can be checked.

2. Submit shop drawings for custom items indicating field dimensions, adjacent construction, filler panels, utility connections and other requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for each fitting and trim item edited to job conditions.

C. Verify all field measurements. Measurements available prior to submittal of shop drawings shall be shown and so noted on the shop drawings. Measurements not available prior to submission of shop drawings shall be noted on the shop drawings as not available and such measurements shall be obtained prior to fabrication.

D. Product Samples: Provide fitting and trim assemblies for a fume hood assembly mock up for review and acceptance by the University. Coordinate installation with laboratory fume hood manufacturer. If hood is accepted it may be reused as part of the project. Acceptance of the mock up is still subject to testing specified in Part 3 of this section.


A. Deliver fittings and trim in clearly identified packaging indicating manufacturers’ name and stock number, etc.

B. Store and protect fittings and trim from subsequent construction as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer must provide a 5 (five) year warranty on all fixtures provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FAUCETS, FITTINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturer: Design, materials, construction and finish of faucets fittings and trim specified are the minimum acceptable standard of quality. The basis of this product specification is Watersaver Faucet Co. ColorTech 701 West Erie Chicago, Illinois 60610 312-333-5500.




B. The manufacturer for the submitted product is to provide line by line, item by item comparative description, listing variations of the specified and proposed product, fully documented to show compliance with the drawings and specifications. Include proposed product data sheets, manufacturer name, product number, complete specifications, descriptive data and independent test reports, and furnish samples as required. If the proposed submitted product is not documented as specified, the shop drawings will be returned not reviewed.

C. Trim and Fitting Assemblies: Fittings scheduled shall have the following features:

1. Material shall be carefully selected to accommodate the media used. The Valve house shall be of high quality forged brass for maximum material density.

2. All fixtures shall be supplied with features per plumbing trim selection (no deviations accepted) as well as the following specifications. Fixtures for countertops and fume hoods shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

3. All valves for gases and water shall have an integrated shutoff valve for presetting of flow as well as shutoff for maintenance.

4. The coating on all fixtures and handles shall be an electrostatically applied polyester powder coating, highly resistant to most chemicals, heat and ultraviolet fading. No deviation accepted.

5. Headworks for all laboratory service fixtures shall be renewable units containing all working components subject to wear.

6. Special Cleaning of brass components: All brass components shall be specifically washed and cleaned before being coated and assembled to avois any machining/cooling oil to be in contact with the media. Maximum amount of pollution shall not exceed 200mg/squalre meter.

7. Handles shall be made of metal and powder coated according to US recommendations for media indication. No deviation accepted.

8. Handle Colour Schedule:

Service Colour Letters

Cold Water Dark Green CW Hot Water Red HW Gas Navy Blue GAS (Burning) Air Orange AIR Vacuum Yellow VAC Vacuum Yellow VC from vacuum cabinet Nitrogen Brown NIT Argon Violet AR Oxygen Light Green OXY



Acetylene Purple C2H2 (Burning) Pure Water White RO Helium Black HE Hydrogen Light Blue HYD Nitrous Oxide Light Green N2O Carbon Dioxide Pink CO2 Special Gas Light Blue SG

D. Water Faucet Trim and Fitting Assemblies:

1. Pressure Testing: All fixtures shall be pressure tested before leaving the factory. Maximum working pressure for water fixtures must be a minimum 147 PSI. No deviation accepted.

2. Nozzles: Nozzles for water shall be fixed yet detachable with a hexagon key which is used inside of the nozzle to avoid damaging of the chemical resistant coating. The nozzle shall be tapered and shall be serrated. The valve house shall be prepared for female 3/8” connection once the nozzle has been removed.

3. Headworks: Provide hot and cold water. Provide ceramic headwork cartridge, no deviation accepted.

a. Opening/closing function: 180 degree turn. b. Opening/closing function: 90 degree turn for blade handles.

4. Water fixtures shall be supplied with a field adjustable gooseneck for either partly swivel turn, 360 degree swivel turn or fixed in any desired location. Only double O-ring seal will be accepted.

a. All goosenecks shall provide a 1/2” male outlet thread for attachment or aerators, serrated nozzles at each faucet.

b. Aspirators shall be provided at all goosenecks as indicated. c. Where indicated by product number, a vacuum breaker shall be

integrated in gooseneck.

5. Pure Water Faucet assemblies shall be coordinated with plumbing requirements as specified.

6. Drench Hose Assembly: Fittings scheduled shall have the following features:

a. Finish: Chemical resistant, factory applied epoxy or thermoplastic polyamide coating on exposed surfaces.

b. Body: Brass. c. Eye Guard: Drench hose head to have dust cap as well as soft rubber

cup to protect the user. d. Valve must be a stay-open valve when activated, self closing with

squeeze handle. Valve to include flow restrictor for adjusting of the




water jet(s) as well as s non return valve. e. Water Flow: 2 to 3 gallons per minute. f. Hose: Provide 5’-0” silicone hose with braided stainless steel cove. g. Certifications: Unit shall be OSHA and AWSI certified. h. Provide undercounter tempering valve. i. Provide undercounter inline vacuum breaker.

E. Gas Fittings and Trim Assemblies:

1. Assembly:

a. Ground key cocks for general use shall be chrome plated brass tested to 300 PSI (100 PSI working pressure).

b. Needle valves (for fine control) shall be chrome plated brass tested to 147 PSI (100 PSI working pressure).

c. Local Shut Off: Gas fittings and/or valves are to incorporate integral ball valve to shut off gas in connection with product service, medium conservation and a safety lock preventing unintended opening of the fixture, without the need to shut off a line valve.

2. Mounting shanks and NPT connection locknuts shall be factory installed and tested as needed for intended installation. Provide O-ring to seal underneath.

3. Pressure Testing: All fixtures shall be pressure tested before leaving the factory.

a. Maximum working pressure for all air, vacuum and non-burning gas fixtures shall be minimum 147 PSI. No deviation accepted.

b. Fixtures for burning gases shall have a minimum working pressure of 100 PSI.

4. Nozzles: Nozzles for non burning gases and oxygen shall be fixed yet detachable with a hexagon key which is used inside of the nozzle to avoid damaging of the chemical resistant coating. The nozzle shall be tapered and serrated. The valve house shall be prepared for female 3/8” connection once the nozzle has been removed.

5. Headworks for all laboratory service fixtures shall be renewable units containing all working components subject to wear:

a. Air and Non Burning Gases: Fine regulating headwork, with replaceable components and seat. Provide user with fine flow control for accurate flow adjustment.

b. Vacuum (VAC): High flow headwork, with replaceable components and seat resistant to chemicals. Provide user with a high flow characteristic.



c. Gas:

1) Fixtures for burning gases shall be provided with a Press/Turn safety headwork with handle including pop-up indication safety buttons. No deviations accepted.

2) Internal; O-rings and lubricant shall be approved for burning gases.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate with the work of other sections to insure the proper installation of fittings and trim.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Workmanship: Install trim and fittings plumb, level and in alignment with adjacent materials.

B. Supplementary Parts: Include supplementary parts necessary to complete trim and fitting work.

C. Fittings:

1. Mount fittings on or in laboratory countertops, casework, reagent racks and partitions as indicated on the drawings.

2. Mount fume hood remote control valves with the visual integrated shut off valve in the 6 o’clock position.

D. Utility Piping: Provide utility piping and connections to fixtures.

E. All fixtures shall be supplied complete with threaded mounting shank for NPT connection. Mounting hardware with stainless steel locking ring and nut with set screws for vandal resistance and protection of plumbing under countertops shall be included. Provide O-ring to seal underneath the fixture flange and countertop and to avoid liquids from running off the countertop.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed components from damage during subsequent construction.




PART 4 SCHEDULES

Faucet Fixture Schedule:

Tag Faucet Type Mount Features Product Number F1 Mixing Faucet Deck Swivel Gooseneck w/Vacuum Breaker CT414VB-BH F2 Mixing Faucet Deck Fixed Gooseneck w/Vacuum Breaker CT414VB F3 Single Tap Deck Fixed Gooseneck w/Vacuum Breaker CT611VB F4 Pure Water Faucet Deck Recirculating Polyethylene BT7837 F5 Drench Hose Deck Eye Wash Deck Mounted EW1022-BP F6 Single Tap, ADA Deck Fixed Gooseneck w/Vacuum Breaker CT611VB-BH

Gas Fitting Schedule:

Tag Gas Type Valve Mount Product Number D1 Non-Burning Single Wall CT5280FT-325 D2 Non-Burning Single Overhead D3 Non-Burning Single Panel QCFL-B-3M-K_ D4 Non-Burning Single Straight CT2880 D5 Non-Burning Single Deck CT2880-231WSA D6 Non-Burning Double Deck CT2880-232SWSA D7 Non-Burning Single Deck, ADA CT4200-131WSA B1 Burning Single Wall BT5260FI-226WSA B2 Burning Single Overhead BT3160I-231WSA B3 Burning Single Panel QCFL-SS-3M-K5 B4 Burning Single Straight BT4860FI-226WSA B5 Burning Single Deck BT28601-231WSA B6 Burning Double Deck BT28601-232SWSA V1 Vacuum Single Wall CT5280FT-325 V2 Vacuum Single Overhead V3 Vacuum Single Panel QCFL-B-3M-K4 V4 Vacuum Single Straight CT2880 V5 Vacuum Single Deck CT2880-231WSA V6 Vacuum Double Deck CT2880-232SWSA V7 Vacuum Single Deck, ADA CT4200-131WSA E1 Electrical Single Deck, Single Sided CTE500WS E2 Electrical Double Deck, Double Sided, plus 2 data CTE600WS E3 Electrical Single Deck, Double Sided, Separated CTE800WS



Fume Hood Fixture Schedule:

Tag Faucet Type Features Product Number H1 Remote Control Valve Water CT739_W H2 Remote Control Valve Non Burning Gas, Air, Vacuum CT739_N H3 Remote Control Valve Burning Gas CTFS 750G [Pop up] H4 Remote Control Valve Rigid Gooseneck Water CT071VB-WSA H5 Remote Control Valve Non Burning Gas, Air, Vacuum CT022-WSA H6 Remote Control Valve All Valves, Accessible Hood CT4285V_B END OF SECTION 115343



WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553.19-1

SECTION 123553.19– WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Laboratory casework system that includes support and utility-space framing, wall panels, undercabinet lighting, and modular countertops.


1. Rough Carpentry 2. Section 115313 “Laboratory Fume Hoods” 3. Section 115343 “Service Fittings and Accessories” 4. Electrical 5. Mechanical

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including bottoms of cabinets more than 48" above floor, and visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.

1. Ends of cabinets, including those installed directly against walls or other cabinets, are defined as "exposed."

B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as cabinet interiors, shelves, and dividers; and interiors and sides of drawers.

1. Tops of cabinets 78" or more above floor are defined as "semiexposed."

C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation.

D. Hardwood Plywood: Panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with adhesive and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.


A. System Structural Performance: Laboratory casework and module support framing system shall withstand effects of the following minimum gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors:



1. Top of Support Framing System: 500 lb/ft. 2. Shelves:

a. 6”, 8”, and 12” Deep: 180 lbs. per shelf. b. 18” Deep: 130 lbs. per shelf. c. 24” Deep: 100 lbs. per shelf.

3. Work Surfaces, Dead and Live Load: 600 lbs. per surface. 4. Suspended Base Cabinets: 300 lbs. 5. Dead and Live Load, Total: 1520 lbs. supported by structure above work surface,

per freestanding extended table frame.

B. Seismic Performance: Provide laboratory casework anchorages able to withstand effects of earthquake motions calculated per requirements of ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," Section 9, "Earthquake Loads".

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Indicate locations of hardware and keying of locks. 2. Indicate locations and types of service fittings. 3. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory

casework. 4. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping. 5. Include details of support framing system. 6. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings. 7. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other

building components, and other laboratory equipment. 8. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other

Sections.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of countertop material indicated, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.

E. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified test agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.





A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Qualified manufacturer that produces laboratory casework of type indicated for this Project; whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework. Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects or performance characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. Other manufacturers' laboratory of similar sizes and configurations, and complying with the Specifications and Project requirements may be considered. Refer to 016000 Product Requirements.

D. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid storage, provide units listed and labeled as complying with requirements of a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified test agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct at Project site.


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Casework Manufacturer Warranty: 3 years from Final Completion. Warranty is for the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer shall promptly investigate and address said deficiencies.

1. Defects in materials and workmanship. 2. Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum SEFA 8W

standards as certified by independent third party testing laboratory. 3. Within the warranty period, manufacturer, at their option, repair, replace, or refund

the purchase price of defective casework.



B. Casework manufacturer shall be notified immediately of defective products, and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return. Casework manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized repairs or labor. Casework manufacturer makes no other warranty, expressed or implied, to the merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, design, sale, installation, or use, of casework; and, shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages, losses of or expenses, resulting from the use of their products.

1. The warranty with respect to products from another company sold by the casework manufacturer is limited to the warranty extended by that other company.

C. Casework manufacturer shall provide, with close-out documents, a Certificate of Warranty for products provided.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory casework.

B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other laboratory equipment.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.

B. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of wood laboratory casework provided. Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.

C. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cabinet Mounting Clips and Related Hardware: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 20 of each type.

2. Modular Countertop Units: Two extra units of each length and material installed.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal: Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish.

B. Particleboard: Not allowed.

C. MDF: Not allowed.

D. Wood Door and Drawer Front Materials:

1. General: Provide materials selected and arranged for compatible grain and color. Do not use materials adjacent to one another that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.

2. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.

3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, unless otherwise indicated with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain. Provide backs of same species as faces.

a. Wood Species: White Maple. b. Face Veneer Cut: Plain Slice.

4. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, selected for compatible grain and color, with moisture content not more than 7 percent.

5. Edgebanding for Wood-Veneered Construction: Minimum 1/8" thick, solid wood of same species as face veneer.

6. Hardboard: Forbidden. 7. Melamine: Forbidden.

E. Concealed Materials:

1. Solid Wood: Any species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. 2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood. Provide backs of same species as faces. 3. Hardboard: Forbidden. 4. Melamine: Forbidden.

2.2 AUXILIARY CABINET MATERIALS

A. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4" thick, polyethylene or polypropylene.

B. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear float glass complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; provide Kind FT if required by authorities having jurisdiction.



2.3 COUNTERTOP AND SINK MATERIALS

A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end overhang of 1", with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2" from edge, or as otherwise indicated.

B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect, and as indicated on Drawings.

C. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish; provide where indicated.

1. Physical Properties:

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi. b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi. c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100. d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.

2. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents per NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.

b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).

3. Color: Black.

2.4 LABORATORY CASEWORK SYSTEM

A. Design, materials, construction and finish of laboratory furniture specified is the minimum acceptable standard of quality for flexible laboratory casework. The basis of this product specification is “Signature” Series, full flush overlay, as manufactured by Kewanee Scientific Corporation. Manufacturers other than those listed here will not be considered.

1. CampbellRhea ICI Tier 1 2. CiFLab Solutions

B. Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing, suspended modular cabinets, undercabinet task-lighting fixtures, countertops, and fittings needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners for securing support framing to permanent construction.




1. Base cabinets can be removed without providing temporary support for, or removing, countertops.

C. Undercabinet Task-Light Fixtures: Single-tube fluorescent fixtures with switch and heavy-duty cord and plug.

1. Finish: Baked enamel. 2. Diffusers: Virgin acrylic with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to

aging, heat, and UV radiation. 3. Ballast Sound Rating: A. 4. Provide at all overhead cabinets.

D. Countertops: Provide in modular lengths indicated, without seams.

2.5 WOOD FINISH

A. Preparation: Sand lumber and plywood before assembling. Sand edges of doors, drawer fronts, and molded shapes with profile-edge sander. Sand after assembling for uniform smoothness at least equivalent to that produced by 220-grit sanding and without machine marks, cross sanding, or other surface blemishes.

B. Finish: Apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard transparent finish. Sand and wipe clean between coats. Topcoat(s) may be omitted on concealed surfaces.

2.6 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.

1. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 2. Design: Verify with Architect. 3. Strainers and tailpieces.

B. Drawer and hinged door pulls shall be mounted horizontally. Provide stainless steel pulls, with radius edges 1/2” (13mm) diameter and 5-1/16” (128mm) centers.

C. Hinges: Institutional type, five knuckle projecting barrel hinges, minimum 2-1/2" long, type 302 or 304 stainless steel. Provide two hinges for doors up to 36" high; three hinges for doors over 36" high. Drill each leaf for three screw attachment to door and frame.

D. Door catches: Adjustable type, spring actuated nylon roller catches.

E. Elbow catches: Spring type of cadmium plated steel, with strike of suitable design.

F. Locks: National Lock Remove-A-Core 5-disc tumbler, heavy duty cylinder type. Exposed lock noses shall be dull nickel (satin) plated and stamped with identifying numbers. All cabinets shall be provided with a lock.



G. Keying: Locks shall have capacity for 2000 primary key changes. Master key one level with built in flexibility to accommodate, if required, 3-levels, 1-Grandmaster, 59-Master groups and 70 Sub-master groups with 13 primary changes under each. All keying shall be verified with the Owner by the Contractor. All cabinets shall be keyed alike.

H. Keys: Stamped brass available from manufacturer or local locksmith, and supplied in the following quantities unless otherwise specified:

10 - for each keyed different lock. 10 - for each group keyed alike locks. 10 - for master keys for each system.

I. Label holders: Formed steel with satin chrome finish, 1" x 1-1/2", screw installed. Locate at all island drawers in the Chemistry Lab.

J. Shelf clips: Die formed steel, zinc plated, designed to engage in shelf adjustment holes.

K. Drawer/Shelf Slides: “E” coat, self closing steel with 100% full extension. Rollers shall be stainless steel ball bearings. Load capacity 150 pounds minimum. Provide Accuride model 9301 or approved equal.

2.7 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings, General: Provide UL-labeled units complying with Division 16 Sections, complete with metal housings, receptacles, terminals, switches, pilot lights, device plates, and accessories and gaskets required for mounting on casework.

B. Receptacles: Provide Hospital Grade, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding devices rated at 20 A, 125 V, ac.

1. GFCI Receptacles: Provide ground-fault circuit interrupter duplex receptacles where indicated and when located in units containing water supplies or sinks.

C. Switches: Provide single-pole, double-pole, or 3-way switches, as required; rated 120 to 277 V, ac; and in amperage capacities to suit units served.

D. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized steel boxes.

E. Finishes for Service Fitting Components: Furnish housings or boxes for pedestal and line type fittings with manufacturer’s standard baked on, chemical resistant enamel in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

F. Cover Plates: Provide satin finish, Type 302 or 304, stainless-steel cover plates with formed, beveled edges.

G. Cover-Plate Identification: Provide identification on cover plates at receptacles, switches, terminal posts, and other locations as indicated. Provide 1/4 inch high letters, unless otherwise indicated.




1. Provide identification on the following devices whether indicated on Drawings or note.

a. Receptacles, other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type. Indicate voltage and phase.

2. On stainless steel, stamp or etch directly on plate and fill in letters with black enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of laboratory casework and furnishings.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS

A. Install cabinets in accordance with SEFA 2.3 "Installation of Scientific Laboratory Furniture and Equipment" and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

1. Wall .Cabinets: Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top; at not less than 24 inches O.C. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.

C. Suspended Cabinets:

1. Hang cabinets, shelves, acid work surfaces from suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit future height adjustment, removal and replacement without disassembling other components or framing system.

2. Adjust adjacent cabinets, shelves and work surfaces indicated to be at same height to within 1/16 inch of alignment.

3. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.

D. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.



E. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIXED WORK SURFACES

A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop. Keep field joints to absolute minimum. Provide full length one-piece tops where ever possible.

1. Use concealed clamping devices for field joints in plastic-laminate countertops. Locate clamping devices within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints.

C. Fastening:

1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z.-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches O.C.

3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance.

D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings.

E. Seal unfinished edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate countertops with heavy coat of polyurethane varnish.

F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash, with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.

G. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

H. Seal edges of tops, backsplashes and side splashes to adjacent wall surface with acid-resistant sealant.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.




B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, shelves, and pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

B. Cover for protection against soiling and deterioration during remainder of construction period.

C. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

END OF SECTION 123553.19